Service You Can Depend On. Maxon offers solution driven products designed to be versatile and cost-effective with the flexibility to change your work environment as your needs change. With a wide range of price points, features, and benefits that make sense, our quality products are manufactured with efficiency to assure that you are getting the right product at the right price.

EMERGE

Value Without Compromise.

REFERENCE

2016 Maxon Pricebook

QuickShip. PREFIX

Certain products and finishes are available on the Maxon QuickShip program from our manufacturing plant located in Muscatine Iowa. QuickShip Production is a premium service and additional charges may apply. Please refer to the Maxon Terms and Conditions or contact a Maxon representative for details.

Field Support.

Space Planning. All Maxon products are fully supported by industry design programs for easy specification by dealers, representatives, and our in-the-field Sales Solutions Representatives.

Maxon pays freight for orders that exceed $8,000 list value on the Maxon Dealer Program, which applies to freight destinations within the 48 contiguous states. For shipments outside the 48 contiguous states, The Company pays freight to the freight forwarder or to the point of embarkation. Please refer to the Maxon Terms and Conditions for complete freight program details.

PREPARE

Products You Can Trust.

SURPASS

Freight Program.

WORKSURFACES

Our extensive network of representatives are your partners in selling Maxon products. They will keep you informed about new products and programs, conduct training for new salespeople, offer space planning services and assist you with generating leads.

EMERGE™ | Frame and Tile Panel System

Office furniture should be easy and affordable without compromising quality. Enhanced for 2016, PREFIX delivers on the goal that every budget deserves durable, flexible furniture. Two-inch thick raceway panels are available in tackable and non-tackable fabric with frameless glass, glass inserts or glass or fabric stackers. Variable height panels allow for almost any configuration from a private office to a benching application. Mix PREFIX panels with our SURPASS worksurfaces for even more flexibility in your office.

INDEX

SURPASS is a freestanding desking system designed to embrace the open office and add creativity to your benching needs. Easy to order and easy to use, SURPASS offers the most requested worksurface shapes and sizes. Choose your worksurface along with finishes and then choose the appropriate support. All the support that SURPASS worksurfaces need, such as panel legs, modesty panels and hardware, are sold as a kit. Just choose the support kit to match your desktop. Add accessories like hutches, screens, stand-alone storage and tool rails and you're done. SURPASS is also designed for value, giving you a great looking office without breaking the budget.

SEATING

SURPASS® | Desking System

ACCESSORIES

PREFIX® | Monolithic Panel System

STORAGE

EMERGE frame and tile solution offers extreme flexibility, whether you work collaboratively or need individual focus, EMERGE supports your work environment needs. With its refined design details, you can keep it basic or dress it up. The lower panels and frameless glass provide an open, naturally lit workspace that inspires. EMERGE is built to last with steel panels that stand up to years of use and numerous reconfigurations. It can also be paired with other Maxon products to create beautiful, functional spaces that look as good as they work.

Prices effective January 4, 2016. Information in this pricebook is accurate as of January 4, 2016. The pricebook is updated quarterly. Go to www.MaxonEdge.com to find the most current pricing information in the electronic pricebook. Information is updated monthly in CAD and GIZA. Maxon recommends updating 20-20 Technologies software every month.

1

EMERGE

REFERENCE

Reference Ordering Checklist Use the following checklist to process your next order through Maxon more quickly and efficiently. Please copy this form for future use.

FF Maxon Account Number FF Maxon Model Number

PREFIX

FF Fabric Code FF Laminate Code / Edge Color

WORKSURFACES

FF Paint Color FF Purchase Order Number and Price FF List and Net Price

SURPASS

FF Complete Ship-To Address FF Clearly state Special Instructions (i.e. QuickShip Production Request, Carrier, Advance Delivery Notification, Side Marks)

PREPARE

FF Maxon Bid Number must accompany purchase orders to receive negotiated discount (If Applicable)

FF Special Component Requests (ex. SPLM/COMF/COML Number)

FF Submit your orders on Maxon Edge (click on the e-Ordering Icon, featured on the homepage) FF Send any questions to [email protected] FF Review the email or faxed acknowledgement within 24 hours FF Advise Maxon of any error immediately

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

(If Applicable)

Prices are subject to change without notice. All orders are subject to the prices in effect at the time of order acknowledgement. If applicable, freight is added at time of order entry. Orders acknowledged prior to effective date of price adjustment are billed at the acknowledged price if shipped within normal leadtimes. If late shipment occurs due to customer request to delay or an extended leadtime is requested, the order may be re-priced.

2

Reference

Your Maxon product is backed by our Limited Lifetime Warranty to be free from defects in material or workmanship for as long as you, the original purchaser, own it. We will repair or replace at our discretion any Maxon product or component that fails under normal commercial office use, free of charge. This warranty contains your sole and exclusive remedy for any warranty claim and is subject to the limitations, exclusions and other provisions set forth below.

PREFIX

∙∙ The following components are covered for 2 years from the date of sale: keyboard tray wrist supports. ∙∙ The following materials and components are covered for 5 years from the date of sale: glides, casters, CPU carts, CPU holders, flat screen monitor arms, footrests, panel and seating fabrics, foam, laminates, and other covering materials. ∙∙ The following components are covered for 10 years from the date of sale: seating controls. ∙∙ The following components are covered for 12 years from the date of sale: electrical components (lamps and ballasts are not covered).

EMERGE

Limitations

REFERENCE

Maxon® Limited Lifetime Warranty

Exclusions ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Normal wear-and-tear, which is to be expected over the course of ownership. Damage caused by carrier in-transit, which will be handled under separate terms. Modifications or attachments to the product that are not approved by Maxon Furniture Inc. Products not installed, used, or maintained in accordance with product instructions and warnings. Products used for personal or household use or for rental purposes. Customer’s Own Material (COM) selected by and used at the request of the owner.

∙∙ Normal commercial office usage for seating is defined as the equivalent of a single shift, 40-hour workweek. To the extent that a seating product is used in a manner exceeding this, the applicable warranty period will be reduced in a pro-rata manner.

SURPASS

Seating Usage

WORKSURFACES

This warranty does not apply to:

To Obtain Service Under This Warranty PREPARE

Your Maxon Dealer is our partner in supporting your warranty requests. Follow the procedures outlined below for the best level of service: ∙∙ Contact your Dealer from whom the product was purchased within 30 days of discovery of the defect. Be prepared to affirm you are the original purchaser of the product and to provide the serial numbers (s) from the product in question.

TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, MAXON FURNITURE INC. MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. MAXON FURNITURE INC. WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES.

SEATING

This warranty applies only to products sold within the United States of America and the Commonwealth of Canada.

ACCESSORIES

∙∙ If Maxon Furniture Inc. affirms that the product in question is eligible under the conditions of the warranty as stated above, the Customer Support representative or other representative of Maxon Furniture Inc. will determine whether to provide replacement parts, authorize repairs, or replace the product.

STORAGE

∙∙ Your Dealer will gather all pertinent information regarding the claim, inspect the product and contact Maxon Furniture Inc. Customer Support representative. (Please allow a reasonable amount of time for inspection and review.)

INDEX

3

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

Table of Contents

4

Reference

Introduction Ordering Checklist Maxon Limited Lifetime Warranty Table of Contents Fabrics and Finishes Special Ordering & COM How to Specify

EMERGE

Specification Information Frames Brackets and Supports Door Panels Tiles Connection Posts Electrical Overhead Storage Accessories

PREFIX

Specification Information Panels Doors Panel Connectors Electrical Overhead Storage Accessories

WORKSURFACES Specification Information Worksurfaces Rectangular Transitional Arc Corner Worksurfaces L-Returns Peninsulas

Extensions & Connecting Tops 120 Corner Countertops Worksurface Support Kits Wall Track & Countertop Support

1 2 3 4-5 6-11 12-16 18-19

21-37 38-39 40 41 42-49 50-51 54-60 61-65 66-69

71-83 84-88 90-91 92-94 99-105 106-111 112-115

117-123 124-127 128-129 130 131-134 135-138 139-144 145-147 148 149-153 154-161 162-163

Table of Contents

Specification Information Table Tops Bases Accessories

STORAGE

SEATING INDEX Index

261

263-270

SEATING

Specification Information and Seating

249 250 251-252 252 253-255 256-259 260

ACCESSORIES

Specification Information Monitor Arms Keyboard Trays, Computer Storage, Footrest Lighting Accessory Rails & Components Touch-Up Paints

STORAGE

ACCESSORIES

PREPARE

End Tower with Bookcase Storage Cabinets Storage Accessories

229 230-232 233 234-235 236-238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245-247

SURPASS

Specification Information Pedestal Files Personal Storage Center Lateral Files INCLUDE Lateral Tops Overfile Cabinets Bookcases Personal Storage Tower

213-216 218-223 224 225-227

WORKSURFACES

PREPARE

186-187 188-190 191-192 193 194 195-196 197-199 200 202-203 204-205 206-207 208-211

PREFIX

Return Shells to Rectangular Support Kits Legs Peninsula Modesty Panels and Leg Brackets Modesty Panels Sound Deadening Modesty Panel Inserts Hutches and Accessories Desktop Mounted Screens Accessories Electrical

165-173 174-175 176 177 178-179 180-185

EMERGE

Specification Information Rectangular Worksurfaces Bowfront Worksurfaces Executive Worksurfaces Corner Worksurfaces Peninsula Worksurfaces L-Return Worksurfaces Rectangular Support Kits

REFERENCE

SURPASS

INDEX

5

REFERENCE EMERGE

Create Your Own Vision

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

Fabric and Finishes

6

Maxon’s Fabric and Finish program provides you options for coordinated finishes easily and creating a custom palette reflecting your own vision. You can choose your finishes considering different price grades, aesthetic options and lead times.

Our finish program allows you to select your finishes in the following categories: • Panel Fabrics · Maxon Core Fabrics (Grades A & B) · COM Fabrics • Paint Finishes · Maxon Core Paints · Maxon Premium Paints • High-Pressure Laminate Finishes (for worksurfaces & vertical surface options) · Maxon Core(C) and Wilsonart The Standards · Edgeband (E) in Solid and Woodgrain as well as T-Mold (T) edge options to match Maxon Core Paint offerings • Glass Finishes · Clear and Frosted Glass • Upholstery Fabrics Some fabrics are directional due to their weave. All Maxon fabrics are now railroad. Please see the following pages for details on applications, lead times, and pricing structure of applicable finish grades.

Fabric and Finishes

Paint Finish Options Maxon Furniture Inc. offers durable paint finish options to meet your pricing, timeline and design needs. Core paint finish options include Black, Flint, Loft, Griege, Brownstone, and Muslin on the Maxon QuickShip program. Premium paint finish options include Gunmetal, Champagne, Platinum and White on the Maxon standard leadtime program. Please reference the premium paint finish upcharge chart for details per product category.

EMERGE

Premium Paint Finish Upcharges

Premium paint upcharges apply on a per model basis in list dollars.

Code

Black

MPBL

Flint

MP02

Loft

MP7B

Griege

MPT5

Brownstone

MP7D

Muslin

MPT3

Gunmetal

MPR3

Champagne

MPR5

Platinum

MPPL

White

MPWT

SURPASS

Paint Finish

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX and EMERGE Panels, Frames and Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $51 PREFIX and EMERGE Panel Connectors and Power Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $26 EMERGE Glass, Steel and Laminate tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $51 Overhead Cabinets, Overhead Shelves, SURPASS Hutches and Tackboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $64 SURPASS Support and SURPASS Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $79 PREPARE Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $79 Pedestal Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $58 Lateral Files, Bookshelves, Overfiles, Personal Storage Centers, INCLUDE, and Storage Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $158 SURPASS End Panels and Storage Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $32 Worksurface Support Kits, Cantilevered Worksurface Brackets, Countertop Brackets, Wall Strips, and Spanner Rails . . . . . $26 Return Worksurface Bracket and Shelf Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $7 Accessories (Accessory Rails and Paper Management) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $20 Tackboards and Whiteboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $26

PREFIX

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

REFERENCE

Core and Premium Paint Finish Options

Core Paint Finishes

PREPARE STORAGE

Premium Paint Finishes

ACCESSORIES

∙∙ Premium Paint is available on standard lead time. ∙∙ Premium Paint finishes are subject to an upcharge calculated on the above schedule.

Maxon Furniture Inc. offers clear glass and frosted glass options for the EMERGE and PREFIX panel systems to meet your pricing, privacy and aesthetic needs. Clear glass option is included in the base price. Frosted glass is available with an upcharge to the list price. Finish

Code

Clear Glass

Clear

C

Frosted Glass*

Frosted

FT

INDEX

Glass Option

SEATING

Glass Options

*Refer to Product Sections for frosted glass upcharge pricing

7

Fabric and Finishes Maxon Furniture Inc. offers a selection of quality fabrics in Grade A options. Fabrics available for QuickShip are marked in the column.

Fabric Swatches

You may order a 16" x 20" fabric sample of any of our panel fabrics. Specify model M-SYSFS.FABRIC COLOR (M-SYSFS.REF21). See the ACCESSORIES section for pricing.

Grade A Family

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

Grade A Fabric Options

STORAGE INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

Element

Color

Railroad Code

APN11

n

Loggia

REF21

APN12

n

Pewter

REF22

Moonstone

REF23

Copper

APN18

n

Dark Pewter

APN17

n

Stainless

REF24

Dune

APN15

n

Vanilla

REF25

Reflections

Hummus

APN14

n

Bamboo

REF26

Morel

APN09

n

Winter

REF27

n

Mistral

REF28

APN16

Turmeric

APN10

n

Dune

RFG92

Walnut

APN13

n

Frost

RFG93

n

Tidal

RFG94

Sandbar

RFG95

Artesian

RFG96

APN23

Carbon

APN28

n

Lawn

APN25

n

Refuge

n

n

APN26

n

Hemp

RFG97

Jet

APN27

n

Mineral

RFG98

APN29

n

Mist

LC20

Cherry

APN30

n

Dusk

LC22

n

Framboise

APN31

Neutra

LC24

n

Blackberry

APN32

Snowdrop

LC28

n

Indigo

GN67

Mandarin

n

Lucy

Thyme

LC29 LC30

n n

Flint

GN65

n

Cornsilk

Latte

GN73

n

Aspen

LC32 LC33 LC34

Millet

GN72

n

Fawn

Parchment

GN53

n

Graphite

Veil

GN13

n

Pewter

LC35

n

Woodcut

ECH05

Aquatint

ECH01

Warm Beige

GN55

Wheat

SRT13

Oyster

SRT18

Meadow

SRT25

Sisal

SRT29

n Etch

SRT37

Mist

SRT45

Lemongrass

SRT49

Shale

SRT52

Reef

SRT64

Mushroom

SRT76

n

Ash

SRT88

n

Sesame

SRT93

Desert

SRT33

n

Tempest

Mezzotint

ECH07

Lithograph

ECH03

Intaglio

ECH06

Engrave

ECH02

Crosshatch

ECH04

Dragonfly

TP30

Frost

TP15

Full Steam

TP80

Ginger

TP25

Gold Rush

TP10

n

n

Sandstorm

TP50

Tumbleweed

TP70

n

Wind Chill

TP40

n

Maxon Furniture Inc. may accommodate requests for Customer’s Own Materials (COM). Please refer to the COM program on for details.

8

n

Turquoise

Earth

Sarto

Family

Chai

Espresso

Appoint (Color)

Railroad Code

Artichoke

Nimbus

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Appoint

Color

Grade A Continued

Fabric and Finishes Grade B Fabric Options Fabric Swatches

You may order a 16" x 20" fabric sample of any of our panel fabrics. Specify model M-SYSFS.FABRIC COLOR (M-SYSFS.JST01). See the ACCESSORIES section for pricing.

Family

Bali

JST01

Bogota

JST02

Zurich

JST03

Belize

JST04

Monaco

JST05

Saigon

JST06

Fiji

JST07

Riviera

JST08

Marrakesh

JST09

Dubai

JST10

Shale

MH10

Anthracite

MH11 MH12 MH13 MH14 MH15

Fresh

MH16

Cremini

MH17

Breeze

MH18

Nectar

MH19 MH20 MHWIT

n

STORAGE

Dew Crystal

n

PREPARE

Buff Mineral

SURPASS

Dove Bronze

WORKSURFACES

Mica

Railroad Code

PREFIX

Jet Set

Color

EMERGE

Grade B

Upholstery for Toppers Grade 1 Upholstery Color

Code

Family

Code

Black

CU10

n

Morel

PNS001

n

Iron Ore

CU19

Morel

CU24

n

Bronze

PNS002

n

n

Espresso

PNS003

Espresso

n

CU49

n

Platinum

PNS004

n

Berry

CU62

n

Lawn

PNS005

n

Olivine

CU82

n

Turquioise

PNS006

n

Cerulean

CU90

n

Jet

PNS007

n

Frost

CU22

n

Carbon

PNS008

n

Caramel

CU26

n

Mandarin

PNS009

n

Poppy

CU42

n

Cherry

PNS010

n

Tangerine

CU46

n

Framboise

PNS011

Tomato

CU66

n

Blackberry

PNS012

Glacier

CU96

n

Appoint Seating

INDEX

Color

SEATING

Centurion

Grade 2 Upholstery ACCESSORIES

Family

REFERENCE

Maxon Furniture Inc. offers a selection of quality fabrics in Grade B options. Fabrics available for QuickShip are marked in the column.

Maxon Furniture Inc. may accommodate requests for Customer’s Own Materials (COM). Please refer to the COM program on for details.

9

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

Fabric and Finishes

10

High Pressure Laminate (HPL) Finish Options Maxon Furniture Inc. offers a contemporary selection of high-pressure Wilsonart® Laminate options on our panel system worksurfaces, vertical surfaces, as well as on our freestanding desking systems. The Maxon Core (C) laminate finish options available for the QuickShip program are noted. For additional laminate options, Wilsonart® offers "The Standards" on the open-line wallboard. "The Standards" laminates, in #60, #07 and #38 finish only, are available at an approximate 6% upcharge on the Maxon Standard Leadtime Program. These need to be submitted as a special. Please specify models specific to Panel Systems or Wall Mount applications. All other Wilsonart® laminate requests will be evaluated through the COM process and will be subject to a quoted price and leadtime. When selecting laminate colors, verify an actual color chip to optimize accuracy in design and color. To view the complete Wilsonart laminate collection or to order samples, visit www.wilsonartcontract.com or call your Maxon representative for information on receiving a sample. Wilsonart® Laminates are available in non-directional and directional patterns as noted on the Laminate Reference Guide on the following page. Directional laminate grain patterns will be assembled to run diagonally along worksurface on all corner applications as shown within the worksurface and desking sections.

Type Pattern

Solid

Woodgrain

Description

Code

Sheer Mesh

W4876-38

n

Silver Mesh

W13056-38

n

Frosty White

W1573-60

n n

Loft

W15034-60

Flint

W10592-38

Amber Cherry

W7919K-7

Beigewood

W7850-60

n

Bourbon Cherry

W11034K-07

n

Cognac

W7924K-07

Columbian Walnut

W7943-07

n

Harvest

W7953-38

n

Mocha

W11121-07

Natural Maple

W11021-38

Pinnacle

W7992-38

Shaker Cherry

W7935-07

Grey cells represent Directional Laminate Pattern

n

n

Fabric and Finishes

Worksurface Edge options are available in Edgeband (E) and T-Mold (T) styles, as applicable for each product line. You must specify the model number applicable to the style of edge desired before selecting the edge color. For example, when specifying a 24”D x 60” W rectangular worksurface with T-Mold style edge; specify M-UWR2460T followed by the laminate color and edge selection.

Worksurface Edge Colors are designed to coordinate with paint and laminate finishes. For variety you can specify an edge color that contrasts with the laminate finish. Colors available for QuickShip are noted in the chart below. T-Mold

Black

MEBL

n

MTBL

n

Flint

MEE9

n

MTE9

n

Loft

MEEV

n

MTEV

n

Griege

MET5

n

MTT5

n

Brownstone

ME7D

n

MT7D

n

Muslin

MET3

n

MTT3

n

WORKSURFACES

Edgeband

PREFIX

Solid

Color

Gunmetal Champagne MEPL

MTPL

White

MEWT

Amber Cherry

MEAC

Beigewood

MEDE

n

MTME

n

Bourbon Cherry

MEDH

n

MTDH

n

Cognac

MECN

Columbian Walnut

MEDZ

n

MTMZ

n

Harvest

MEHM

n

MTHM

n

Mocha

MEMH

Natural Maple

MEWD

Pinnacle

MEPC

Shaker Cherry

MEDF

n

MTWT

n

MTAC

PREPARE

MTCN

n

MTWD

STORAGE

MTMH n

MTPC n

MTMF

n

Grommet Colors (SURPASS only)

Grommet colors are pre-selected based on the specified Edgeband or T-Mold color per the table below. Edgeband or T-Mold Color Code

Grommet Color

MEBL / MTBL (Black)

Black

MEDZ/MTMZ (Columbian Walnut)

Black

MEE9/MTE9 (Flint)

Flint

MEDF/MTMF (Shaker)

Black

MEEV/MTEV (Loft)

Loft

MEDE/MTME (Beigewood)

White

MET5/MTT5 (Griege)

Muslin

MEWD/MTWD (Natural Maple)

White

ME7D/MT7D (Brownstone)

Brownstone

MEAC/MTAC (Amber Cherry)

Black

MET3 / MTT3 (Muslin)

Muslin

MEHM/MTHM (Harvest)

Black

MEPL / MTPL (Platinum)

Loft

MEDH/MTDH (Bourbon Cherry)

Black

MEWT / MTWT (White)

White

MECN/MTCN (Cognac)

Black

MEPC/MTPC (Pinnacle)

Black

MEMH/MTMH (Mocha)

Black

INDEX

Grommet Color

SEATING

Edgeband or T-Mold Color Code

ACCESSORIES

Platinum

SURPASS

Wood Grain

EMERGE

Worksurface Edge Colors

REFERENCE

Worksurface Edge Options

11

Specials and Customers Own Material (COM) Program ∙∙

Maxon Furniture Inc., at its own discretion, may modify its standard products to meet specific needs. Modifications include Customer’s Own Material (COM) for seating, panels, special finishes (paints), laminates, and structural modification to existing standard product.

∙∙

Changes or alterations to catalog items other than standard options are subject to additional charges. Prices are furnished upon request. Direct all requests to your Maxon Sales Solution Representative (SSR).

∙∙

Maxon assumes no responsibility for the overall appearance, flammability, normal durability, colorfastness or any other quality standards. Maxon reserves the right to reject a COM if the quality of the COM is not, in Maxon’s sole judgment, satisfactory for the product. Should this occur, the customer would be notified with an explanation within 2 working days of test completion.

∙∙

Maxon is not responsible for fabric that has become obsolete at the COM Supplier, that is of poor quality, or that is delivered late to the manufacturer from the COM Supplier.

∙∙

All cancellations or changes to COM orders are subject to Maxon's LOCD guidelines (Last Order Change Date). Because of the nature of COM, special fabrics, finishes, and structural modifications, products ordered as specials and then cancelled prior to shipment are subject to cancellation costs up to the full value of the product cancelled. Maxon determines the actual cancellation charge at the time the cancellation is requested. Upon approval, a cancellation confirmation fax or e-mail is issued to The Customer.

∙∙

COM for panel applications must be in rolls of 66” wide or wider. Excess yardage is disposed of at the discretion of Maxon Furniture.

∙∙

Due to UL testing requirements COM panel fabric requests may require up to eight weeks for approval, pending the completion of the third party testing requirements.

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

EMERGE

Customer’s Own Material (COM)

PREFIX

REFERENCE

Reference

COM Testing: Manufacturing Feasibility ∙∙

Purchase orders are not accepted or entered unless manufacturing feasibility testing is complete with positive results.

∙∙

If all testing has been previously completed, re-testing is only necessary if The Customer’s material is to be used on a different product family or if a fabric direction has changed from that previously approved. COM testing requires 7 working days from receipt of the Customer material by Maxon.

∙∙

If the COM has not been tested and approved, it is the responsibility of the Customer to provide the Customer Support Department with the COM supplier name, fabric pattern name, and color. The Customer may call Customer Support department for previous test results.

Maxon Customer Support | P 800.876.4274 | F 800.257.2635 | [email protected] 12

www.maxonfurniture.com

Reference

Considerations:

∙∙ All COM requests for special fabric must be tested and approved by Maxon Furniture Inc.

REFERENCE

Panel Fabric (COMF) ∙∙ Directional fabrics are only applied on panels up to 60" wide. ∙∙ Refer to warranty and Terms and Conditions for COM limitations.

Process for Pre-Approved Fabrics

Process for Special Fabrics

PREFIX

∙∙ Call Customer Support (800-876-4274) to see if requested fabric is pre-approved and for pricing information. Maxon will purchase the fabric whenever possible.

EMERGE

∙∙ COM orders are not available on QuickShip. Lead time of 15 business days minimum.

∙∙ Provide fabric supplier, pattern, color, and orientation information to your Maxon representative or Customer Support. Maxon will obtain test samples whenever possible. ∙∙ Allow up to 10 business days for initial testing and approval, after Maxon receives the initial 5 yards of test fabric. ∙∙ Fabrics requiring UL approval may increase testing time and may require additional fabric. ∙∙ Maxon reserves the right to determine if the fabric is to be purchased by Maxon or The Customer. ∙∙ If Maxon purchases the fabric, Customer Support will provide pricing once testing is complete.

WORKSURFACES

∙∙ Maxon will notify you of test results and provide a COM code and price grade if Maxon supplies the fabric.

∙∙ If the customer provides the fabric, The Customer will be charged Grade B pricing. ∙∙ The fabric must be labeled with the dealership name, purchase order number, COMF number and COM Data Sheet to ensure proper handling. ∙∙ As we manufacture our product in a variety of locations, call Customer Support for appropriate shipping address.

SURPASS

∙∙ If supplied by customer, Maxon must receive the approved fabric at least 10 days prior to the start up of production.

∙∙ All special orders require a written purchase order.

PREPARE

∙∙ These orders cannot be cancelled, nor will Maxon accept a product return.

STORAGE

Please ship COM fabric for TESTING to:

INDEX

Maxon Furniture Inc. Attn: COM Test Fabric or COM Dept. Dock Doors 46-48 3000 North Highway 61 Muscatine, IA 52761

SEATING

HNI Fabric Distribution Center - Dealer PO Number COM Production Yardage Docks 2-4 3000 University Drive Muscatine, IA 52761

ACCESSORIES

Please ship COM fabric for ORDERS to:

Maxon Customer Support | P 800.876.4274 | F 800.257.2635 | [email protected] www.maxonfurniture.com

13

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

Reference Upholstery (COMF) Considerations:

∙∙ All COM requests for special upholstery must be tested and approved by Maxon Furniture Inc. ∙∙ COM requests are only available on Pedestals. The Northport Chair does not allow for COM requests. ∙∙ COM orders are not available on QuickShip. Lead time of 15 business days minimum. ∙∙ Refer to warranty and terms and conditions for COM limitations.

Process for Pre-Approved Upholstery ∙∙ Call Maxon Customer Support (800-876-4274) to see if requested upholstery is pre-approved and for pricing information. Maxon will purchase the upholstery whenever possible.

Process for Special Upholstery

WORKSURFACES

∙∙ Provide upholstery supplier, pattern, color, and orientation information to your Maxon representative or Customer Support. Maxon will obtain test samples whenever possible ∙∙ Maxon will notify you of testing results, COM code and price grade if Maxon supplies the upholstery. ∙∙ Allow up to 10 business days for initial testing and approval, after Maxon receives the initial test upholstery. ∙∙ Maxon reserves the right to determine if the upholstery is to be purchased by Maxon or the customer. ∙∙ If Maxon purchases the upholstery, Customer Support will provide pricing once testing is completed.

SURPASS

∙∙ If the customer provides the upholstery, the customer will be charged Grade B pricing. ∙∙ Maxon must receive the approved upholstery at least 10 days prior to start up of production, if supplied by the customer. ∙∙ If the customer supplies upholstery, the upholstery must be labeled with the dealership name and Purchase Order number to ensure proper handling. Dealer must provide Customer Support with the tracking information on COM upholstery being sent to Maxon.

PREPARE

T-Mold/Edgeband (COM)

ACCESSORIES

∙∙ These orders cannot be cancelled, nor will Maxon accept a product return.

STORAGE

∙∙ All special orders require a written purchase order.

∙∙ Custom edge treatments are not available.

Laminates (COML) Maxon Furniture Inc. must approve all COML requests for specialty laminates. The order process is as follows:

SEATING

∙∙ For requests concerning or specialty laminate, please contact your Maxon representative to request a COML. ∙∙ The evaluation of requests will take no longer than 3 business days. ∙∙ Maxon will contact vendor to verify availability and lead times. ∙∙ If the request is approved, Customer Support will contact you with pricing and leadtimes.

INDEX

∙∙ If the request is denied, work with your Sales Solutions Representative (SSR) for alternatives.

Maxon Customer Support | P 800.876.4274 | F 800.257.2635 | [email protected] 14

www.maxonfurniture.com

Reference

Due to Maxon’s flexible manufacturing, we are able to provide specially sized products. The feasibility of the requests depends on the degree of changes needed in design, testing, materials and tooling.

∙∙ Your Maxon representative will review the request. Maxon will determine if it is an established special and if so provide pricing.

EMERGE

∙∙ Contact your Maxon representative with the special component request.

REFERENCE

Special Product/Component Request

∙∙ Your Maxon representative will submit a special for internal approval and pricing. Most internal reviews will be completed within 3 business days of submittal.

∙∙ Customer will be notified of approved products with a special request # for ordering. This number must be referenced on purchase orders. ∙∙ Special request quotes are valid for 6 months only.

∙∙ All special orders require a written purchase order. ∙∙ These orders cannot be cancelled, nor will Maxon accept a product return.

If Maxon Furniture Inc. agrees to use the COM or build a custom product:

∙∙ Maxon shall have no liability for any damages, injuries, or losses to the Customer or to any third party that shall be caused by any COM or custom built product, and the Customer shall hold Maxon harmless from all liability.

STORAGE

∙∙ Maxon shall have no responsibility for the condition, quality, value, performance, physical properties, or any other aspect of a custom-built product, regardless of whether or not Maxon has tested the product, and whether or not the product has passed any Manufacturing Feasibility testing. Maxon disclaims all warranties, express, implied or statutory, with respect to the product, including, without limitation, any implied warranties of MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, or NON-INFRINGEMENT.

PREPARE

∙∙ Maxon shall have no responsibility for the condition, quality, value, performance, physical properties, or any other aspect of the COM, regardless of whether or not Maxon has tested the COM, and whether or not the COM has passed any Manufacturing Feasibility testing. Maxon disclaims all warranties, express, implied or statutory, with respect to the COM, including, without limitation, any implied warranties of MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, or NON-INFRINGEMENT.

SURPASS

Custom Warranty Exclusions

WORKSURFACES

∙∙ Standard lead time for all special requests is at least 15 business days.

PREFIX

∙∙ If the special request is denied, your representative will notify the customer and suggest other alternatives.

ACCESSORIES

∙∙ The Customer is responsible for ensuring that the COM fabric is certified to meet all applicable flame-retardant requirements. This may include UL testing, ANSI/BIFMA standards and certification at the Customer’s expense. The Customer shall hold Maxon harmless from all liability arising out of the Customer’s failure to ensure that COM fabric is certified to meet all applicable flameretardant requirements.

SEATING

Testing Requirements for Flame-Retardant Construction

INDEX

Maxon Customer Support | P 800.876.4274 | F 800.257.2635 | [email protected] www.maxonfurniture.com

15

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

Reference

Special Finish – Paint Requirements ∙∙ Maxon Furniture Inc. may be able to match unique paint colors, excluding metallic and whites. A sample of the exact color desired is required for approval. Each unique color or finish combination incurs a net price up-charge per color per order. A minimum quantity of twenty (20) major units is required per color, per order. ∙∙ Any other extraordinary paint color or other consideration is determined from the sample(s) and special request submitted by the customer. Sample paint colors must be submitted on a metal disk and sent to Maxon Customer Support. Upcharges and lead times are calculated at that time and communicated to the customer. A minimum quantity of twenty (20) major units is required per color, per order.

Modifications to Standard Product

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

∙∙ Requests for special modifications to standard products require engineering evaluations and product safety review prior to approval. Contact your Maxon representative or Customer Support with the specific requirements.

Obsolete Product ∙∙ Requests for obsolete product require engineering evaluation, safety review, and testing to current standards prior to approval. Many obsolete products are not available for order. Special orders requesting obsolete product are not subject to return to Maxon. Requests for obsolete product must be directed to Maxon Customer Support.

CARB Compliance Notice Overview The California Air Resources Board (CARB) has established limits on the emissions of formaldehyde from hardwood plywood, particle board, medium density fiberboard, thin medium density fiberboard, and finished goods containing these materials. Effective January 1, 2009, hardwood plywood, particle board, medium density fiberboard, thin medium density fiberboard, and finished goods containing these materials must meet emissions limits given in title 17, California Code of Regulations section 93120.2. (refer to note below*) All hardwood plywood, particle board, medium density fiberboard, thin medium density fiberboard, and finished goods containing these materials supplied to Maxon Furniture Inc. comply with the current requirements of the CARB regulation.

Note CARB’s rule includes a “sell-through provision”, which allows for a timely clearing of existing inventories following the effective dates for Phase I and Phase II standards. For manufacturers of hardwood plywood, particleboard, medium density fiberboard, and thin density fiberboard 3 months sell-through period is provided. For distributors, a 5 month, and for importers a 3 month sell-through period is provided for hardwood plywood, particleboard, and medium density fiberboard, and thin medium density fiberboard manufactured before the Phase I and Phase II effective dates. An 18 month sell-through period is provided for distributors and importers of finished goods containing hardwood plywood, particleboard, medium density fiberboard, and thin medium density fiberboard. Please see official information available from this link provided below:

INDEX

http://www.arb.ca.gov/regact/2007/compwood07/compwood07.htm

Maxon Customer Support | P 800.876.4274 | F 800.257.2635 | [email protected] 16

www.maxonfurniture.com

Reference REFERENCE EMERGE PREFIX WORKSURFACES SURPASS PREPARE STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

Maxon Customer Support | P 800.876.4274 | F 800.257.2635 | [email protected] www.maxonfurniture.com

17

EMERGE

REFERENCE

Reference

How to Specify There are a number of ways to specify Maxon Furniture product. This guide will show you the different dot option combinations for each area of product. If you have further questions, call Maxon Customer Support at 800-876-4274. Previously, you may have seen a How to Specify section at the bottom of each page in the Maxon Pricebook (like the image below). We have created this section for an easy to find and accurate guide to specifying your product.

How To Specify: PREFIX

Ordering Example: item number

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

M

-

P

F

X

B

-

height

width finish

6

2

5

STORAGE ACCESSORIES

F

E

·

L

7

3

·

M

P

G

Y

Dot Option Combination 1 ∙∙ The following products have Dot Option Combination 1: EMERGE Frames, EMERGE Sliding Door, EMERGE Pass-Thru Tile, EMERGE Accessory Tile, Connectors, Trim, Top Caps, Duplexes, Power Poles, Overhead Storage, Accessories, Whiteboards, Worksurface Supports, SURPASS supports, SURPASS Hutches, and Freestanding Storage. model number

M

paint

·

-

Dot Option Combination 2 ∙∙ The following products have Dot Option Combination 2: EMERGE Technology Tiles. model number

M

paint

·

-

fabric

·

Dot Option Combination 3 ∙∙ The following products have Dot Option Combination 3: Hinged Door and Laminate Tiles. model number

M

SEATING

0

FINISH OPTIONS: paint fabric

paint

·

-

laminate

·

-

Dot Option Combination 4 ∙∙ The following products have Dot Option Combination 4: EMERGE Countertops.

INDEX

model number

M

-

paint

·

edge

laminate

·

-

·

Maxon Customer Support | P 800.876.4274 | F 800.257.2635 | [email protected] 18

www.maxonfurniture.com

Reference

∙∙ The following products have Dot Option Combination 5: EMERGE Glass Tiles, EMERGE Frameless Glass, PREFIX Glass Stackers, PREFIX Frameless Glass. model number

·

-

EMERGE

M

glass

paint

REFERENCE

Dot Option Combination 5

·

Dot Option Combination 6 model number

M

fabric

Dot Option Combination 7 ∙∙ The following products have Dot Option Combination 7: Fabric Tackboards, PREFIX Monolithic Panels and SURPASS Hutch Tackboards, and SURPASS Fabric Screens.

M

fabric

paint

·

-

SURPASS

model number

·

∙∙ The following products have Dot Option Combination 8: PREFIX Glass Header Panels. paint

·

-

glass

·

STORAGE

M

fabric

·

∙∙ The following products have Dot Option Combination 9: Worksurfaces, PREFIX Countertops, SURPASS Worksurfaces and Lateral Worktops.

M

laminate

-

·

Dot Option Combination 10

SEATING

·

-

edge

ACCESSORIES

Dot Option Combination 9 model number

PREPARE

Dot Option Combination 8 model number

WORKSURFACES

·

-

PREFIX

∙∙ The following products have Dot Option Combination 6: EMERGE Fabric Tiles and Storage Cushion.

∙∙ The following products have Dot Option Combination 10: SURPASS Glass Screens.

M

-

glass

·

paint

INDEX

model number

·

Maxon Customer Support | P 800.876.4274 | F 800.257.2635 | [email protected] www.maxonfurniture.com

19

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

Reference

Maxon Customer Support | P 800.876.4274 | F 800.257.2635 | [email protected] 20

www.maxonfurniture.com

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE EMERGE PREFIX

EMERGE Stackable Frame and Tile System

EMERGE Panels stack up to 110" high with expanded panel-height capabilities to create executive offices and private conference rooms with locking doors.

Stackable Steel Frames

Designed to be flexible and durable; while allowing reconfiguration of a workspace without the purchase of additional components.

Hard Surface Tiles

Provides additional finishes for design and special environmental requirements.

Segmented and Monolithic Configurations

Integrate Segmented or Monolithic tiles on opposing sides to value engineer EMERGE while maintaining functional style.

EMERGE Tile Segmentation Bar

Delivers superior fit and finish with consistent alignment between fabric and laminate edge finishes.

Integrated Lay-In Top Pathway, Beltline and Base Channel Raceways

Extensive electrical and data capabilities allow cabling to be routed easily through the top channel, beltline and raceway.

Beltline Power Technology Tiles

Technology tiles allow for easy, one-step access to power and data at desktop height for cell phones, laptops and other frequently used devices.

INDEX

Offer a contemporary look for your space.

SEATING

120 Degree Connector

ACCESSORIES

Benefits

STORAGE

Features

PREPARE

Once you've selected the furniture for your space, a variety of material options are available to give it a personality all its own. Create a bright look with panels and storage in light fabrics, or make a bold statement with woodgrain laminate and contrasting trim and panel fabric. It's your palette to complement your brand or style.

SURPASS

Some people work best through collaboration and others require a more focused approach. EMERGE frame and tile solution offers extreme flexibility, making it easy to provide both types of work environments. With its refined design details, you can keep it basic or dress it up. The lower panels and frameless glass provide an open, naturally lit workspace that inspires. EMERGE is built to last with steel panels that stand up to years of use and numerous reconfigurations. It can also be paired with other Maxon products to create beautiful, functional spaces that look as good as they work.

WORKSURFACES

EMERGE Frame & Tile System

Prices effective as of January 4, 2016. Information in this pricebook is accurate as of January 4, 2016. The pricebook is updated monthly. Go to www. MaxonEdge.com to find the most current pricing information in the electronic pricebook. Information is updated monthly in CAD and GIZA. Maxon recommends updating 20-20 Technologies software every month. *Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

21

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

SIN 711-1

Working with Frames Lay-in top pathway accepts data cables.

Top trim is specified separately for all panel frames.

Panels (frames and tiles) are 3" nominal thick, actual dimension is 25⁄8" thick (use 23⁄4" to calculate inter­sections in length of panel runs). Stacking frames are available in 15" and 30"H.

Beltline area accommodates electrical power and provides desktop access to data and commu­ni­ca­tion cables on 421⁄2"H, 50"H, and 65"H base frames.

Steel horizontal members have vertical cable and electrical routing capacity.

Opening in the side of uprights accommodate a large volume of data cabling and electrical.

Structural panel frames are available in 35", 421⁄2", 50", and 65" nominal heights.

Lay-in base pathway accepts voice, data and fiber optic cable, as well as electrical system.

Leveling glides are accessible from the interior of raceway cover frames.

Base pathway cover has outlet openings that accept duplex receptacles or commercially avai­lable modular data faceplates. Leveling glides provide 23⁄4" of adjustment on frames with raceway covers.

Building Horizontally with EMERGE Frames Important plainning guidelines: For adequate stability, one of two methods of stabiliza­tion must be adhered to: Method 1—Opposing Returns

Method 1—Opposing returns

nels rn Pa n Retu Two arent Ru" max. P 4 4 in./1 48" m

Two

nels

rn Pa

Retu

• A parent run must be a minimum of 48" and a maximum of 144" between return panels. The parent run must have a minimum of two return panels running in opposing directions on each end of run. • A single return panel (48" nominal minimum length) may be used with a mid-panel connector. The panel must extend at least 24" from one side of the parent run. • Return panels must be a minimum of 24" and no more than 30" lower than the maximum height of the parent panel run. • Supports other than return panels can be wall mount brackets, peninsulas, worksurface end panel supports or stationary file supported worksurface.

INDEX

Method 2—Single-Sided Returns n . nt Ru Pare 44" max ./1 in m 48"

nels rn Pad Length e Retu Two Combin . in M 60" Return panels must have combined length 60% of parent run

22

Method 2—Single‑sided returns

• A parent run must be a minimum of 48" and a maximum of 144" between return panels. The parent run must have a mini­mum of two return panels total­ing at least 60% of its length, extending in one direction. • Return panels must not be any more than 30" shorter in height than parent run. When using 120° connections, 12" must be added to length of return panels as determined by methods 1 and 2. Any run under 100" must have a minimum combined length of 60" of return panels. • Supports other than return panels can be wall mount brackets, peninsulas, worksurface end panel supports or stationary file supported worksurface.

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE

Building Vertically with EMERGE Frames REFERENCE EMERGE

Stacking Frames

tile on other side (ACC suffix).

Door Panel Frames • The 95"H door panel includes frame, 42"W door, hinges and attaching hardware. • Specify fabric for top tiles on 95"H door.

Sliding Door and Mounting Kit

• Required between tile segments. Must be specified on each side of frame.

• Optional: can be used to increase the stiffness of interior on EMERGE panel when acoustical tiles are on both sides (F suffix) or acoustic tile one side and tool

• Specifications: formed, steel vertical members, with tubular steel horizontal members are welded into a sturdy, structural panel frame. • Panels are shipped with base pathway covers. • Top trim, monolithic or segmented tiles, and segment bars are ordered separately with choices of applications. • Direct connections between same height frames in a continuous run are accomplished with provided hardware. There is no incremen­tal increase in dimension along the run. • For adequate stability, one of two methods of stabiliza­tion shown on page 22 must be adhered to. • Base raceway panel frames include: frame, base pathway covers, attaching hardware, and bottom segment clip.

Stacking Frames: 15"H, 30"H Leveling Glides on Frames with Raceway Covers: 23⁄4" range *with levelers fully retracted

SEATING

Widths: 24", 30", 36", 42", 48", 60"

ACCESSORIES

Panel Frames

STORAGE

Frame Dimensions (Actual) Depth: 25⁄8" (use 23⁄4" to calcu­late intersections in length of panel run)

PREPARE

Horizontal Stiffner Supports

SURPASS

• See specification on page 26.

Segment Bars

Heights* with flat painted trim: 343⁄8", 417⁄8", 493⁄8", 567⁄8", 643⁄8"

WORKSURFACES

frame (slot modularity will be lost on stacker). • If panel mounting slots are not being used, any stacking frame can be used on any base panel frame. • Do not combine differing frame widths in a single stack. • Stacking frames cannot be used as base frames. • Tile options for stacking frames are given on page 30.

• When adding, remove top trim from the structural frame, and install it on top of uppermost stacking frame. • Stacking connection provides a solid metal‑to‑metal connection, allowing the stacking frame to accept hang-on compo­nents, per EMERGE configuration guidelines. • Includes attachment hardware and uses specified top trim. Add appropriate connectors. • Stacking frames can be added to the top of a 35"H base panel frame up to 80"H, added to 421⁄2"H up to 871/2"H, 50"H base panel frames in any combination up to 95"H, and added to the top of 65"H structural panel frames up to 110"H. • To match door frame height, use a 65"H base panel frame with a stacking

Door Panel Frames

PREFIX

Stacking Frame Connection

INDEX

Order top cap, tiles, and segment bars separately.

Direct Connections

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

23

PREFIX WORKSURFACES

SIN 711-1

Frameless Glass Variable Height Frameless Glass • Frameless insert integrated into the base panel frame. • Replaces top trim on structural or stacking frame. • It is possible to span multiple frames when the combined frame width is equal to the panel mounted screen width. • Taller adjacent in-line frames require FC grooved end trim. • Panel mounted screens are non‑structural. Do not hang or stack on top of panel mounted screens. • Available in 3⁄8" thick clear or frosted glass.

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

Working with Trim

Top Trim – Painted

Top Cap • Use to finish top on base panel frames. • Top trim can span individual or multiple base panel or stacking frames. Taller adjacent in-line frames require FC grooved end trim. • Available in painted metal finish. • Top trim are to be ordered separately.

High-Low End (FV) Trim Kits SURPASS

• High‑low “FV” covers the exposed end of a frame when joining frames of differing height in certain configurations — EMERGE profile adds 3⁄8" to length of panel run. See illustration at left. • At the end of a panel run use “E” model suffix end trim kit.

Grooved High-Low (FC) Trim TABLES

• For use when the base panel frame of a panel mounted screen is shorter than the adjacent in‑line panel.

High-Low “FV” End Trim

• Wall mount kits provide a means to affix a panel run to a permanent building wall. • Kit adds 3/4" to length of panel run. • Includes top cap. (Color must be specified.) • Connector is Black only.

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

“W” Wall Mount Kits

24

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE

Working with Connectors

“L” 90-Degree

“L”, “T”, "X" and “S” Connector Kits

“T” 3-Way

“X” 4-Way

“Y” 120° 3-Way

WORKSURFACES

“V” 120° 2-Way

PREFIX

• For “L”, “T”, “X”, and "S" connector kits, add 23⁄4" to the total length of the panel run for each intersec­tion, whether located in the middle or at the end of the run. • “L”, “T”, “X”, and "S" connector kits includes top cap, connectors, vertical cover, light gap extrusion, and attaching hardware. • “X” connector kits Includes top cap and connectors. • Extended straight connector kit “S” can be used to keep continuous runs dimensionally consistent with opposing panel runs which incorporate “T” or “X” intersections. (Add 23⁄4" to the length of the run for every extended straight connector used.) See illustration at left.

EMERGE

• “L”, “T”, “X”, "S", “V”, and “Y” connector kits are used when connecting frames at intersecting runs. • Base connectors include base pathway and must be specified at base regardless of full height or segmented connection. Specify height that corresponds with segment frame height. See Examples 5 and 6 at left.

REFERENCE

Connector Kits

Extended Straight Connector Kit "S"

Example 2

Connectors required: 1–15"H “S” 1–35"H “T”

Connectors required: 1–15"H “H” 1–71⁄2"H “L” 1–71⁄2"H “T” 1–35"H “X”

• Includes top cap transition, connectors, vertical cover, and attaching hardware.

3-Way 120° (Y) Connector Kits • Includes top cap transition, connectors, vertical cover and attaching hardware.

TABLES

Example 1

2-Way 120° (V) Connector Kits

SURPASS

Multiple-height connections also utilize standard “L”, “T”, “X”, “S”, and “E” connectors, with corresponding height connectors stacked according to the number of intersecting panels from the bottom up. (See below.)

“E” End Trim Kits

Connectors required: 1–15"H “V” 65"H 1–50"H “Y”

Example 4 Connectors required: 1–15"H “H” 1–35"H “Y” 65"H

Example 5

Example 6

Connectors required: 1–30"H “L” 1–35"H “L”

Connectors required: 1–50"H “L” 1–15"H “L”

35"H

35"H

SEATING

50"H

50"H

ACCESSORIES

Example 3

STORAGE

• End vertical trim cover (includes top cap transition — adds 3⁄8" to run).

INDEX

25

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

26

SIN 711-1

Working with Sliding Doors Sliding doors for EMERGE are a great addition to any new or existing installations. The sliding door can be specified with specific mounting kits for each door ordered. With a Frosted Translucent insert and your choice of Core or Select paint, the sliding door will create a unique look for any office environment. The sliding doors are available in 50", 65", and 80"H models and can mount to 30", 36", 42", and 48"W panels. They accommodate a 36"W opening and are 42"W, nominally. The door ships from the factory non-handed and can be installed in either right or left handed applications. The handle pulls located on each side of the door are non-locking and are color matched to the trim to create a uniform style. And with the threshold free design, the sliding door offers better aesthetics and safety by eliminating the potential for tripping.

General Guidelines for Use of Sliding Door • The system requires the ordering of both a door and a mounting bracket kit. • All doors are 42" wide to accommodate a 36"W opening and are non-handed . Door leveling is dependant on floor being level. • A mounting bracket kit must be ordered for each door corresponding to the mounting panels width (30", 36", 42", or 48"W). • Mounting bracket kits are system specific and for EMERGE.

General Guidelines for Layout Planning of Sliding Door • Stability guidelines must be followed when specifying a sliding door. The sliding door system was designed to close an opening in a run of lateral panels. Doors mounted to long runs of panels without floor support, ties to worksurfaces, or return panels may seem less stable. • If the door is used to close an opening (A) where the panel opposite the door is at 90°, there will be a gap equal to the panel thickness between the door and the panel end when closed. • When planning the layout, care must be taken if the plan includes a door mounted on a panel that is less than 42"W. If the panel is at a corner (B), the door will protrude into the aisle or next workstation when in the open position. • If back-to-back doors are mounted on panels (C) that are less than 42"W they will interfere with each if both are open at the same time. • The door is attached at the base of the panel at any end position with a wrap around bracket. Bracket kits are ordered in conjunction with appropriate end trim profiles. The slots at the base of the panel must be clear (D) and cannot be utilized by worksurface supports or panel hung components. • If the door is mounted to a panel run that is positioned adjacent to a wall (E) or an inside 90° angle and there is not a 42" clearance between the track and the wall/inside 90° the assembly of the first stop will be difficult and plans will need to be modified for the assembly. • If a door is closing an opening of a workstation that includes a "T" connector in the opposite wall, an extended straight connector may need to be used to maintain the 36" required opening. • The slide door is designed to be attached to an end of run panel only. The slide door should not be specified to a panel that is connected on both ends, regardless if one of those ends is connecting to a connector kit. Failure abide by this rule will result in a failure to install the door.

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE

Overview of Tiles REFERENCE

Pass-thru Tile

Technology Tile

Accessories Tool Tile

EMERGE White Board

Steel Tile EMERGE Steel Tiles

PREFIX

Fabric Tile

Whiteboard Tile

Laminate Tile

EMERGE

Clear & Frosted Glass Tile

Tiles — T ackable Acoustical and Hard Surface*

SURPASS

Data/Electrical Port (port tiles available as acoustical only)

WORKSURFACES

*Not available in 71⁄2"H

PREPARE STORAGE

Monolithic Tiles — Tackable Acoustical and Port

ACCESSORIES SEATING

Glass Tile Kits INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

27

Base Frames

35"H

421⁄2"H

SIN 711-1

Stacking Frames

50"H

65"H

Doors

Frameless Glass

15"H

30"H

Top Trim/ Screens

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

Sliding 50"H/65"H/80"H

Flat Painted

Glass Panel Mounted Screen

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

95"H Hinged

INDEX

Connector Kits — EMERGE

28

“L” “T” “X” “S”

90° Connector Kit 3-way Connector Kit 4-way Connector Kit Extended Straight Connector Kit

“V” “Y” “W” “E”

2-way 120° (V) Connector Kit 3-way 120° (Y) Connector Kit Wall Mount Kit End Trim Kit

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

Working with Tiles Tile Heights

EMERGE

Monolithic tiles are actually 5" shorter to account for base raceway and top trim.

PREFIX

Typical Tile Height Configurations

30"H

SURPASS

71/2"H

To calculate the total height of tiles(s) required, deduct 5" (height of base/top trim) from the total nominal panel height. Example: 65"H Frame takes 2 30"H tiles. 65–5 = 2 x 30

WORKSURFACES

Middle segment bars are required between any two tiles — order separately based on tile configuration on each side of frame.

PREPARE INDEX

*Additional tile combinations

SEATING

EMERGE tiles are universal (except glass) and can be placed at any 71⁄2" increment on the frame.

ACCESSORIES

Tiles can be ordered in the size that matches the frame height plus the stacker height. Example: Order a 65"H monolithic tile if you are using a 35"H frame plus a 30"H stacker.

STORAGE

Tiles and segment bars for between tiles ordered separately

to those shown at the left are possible; heights above 65" require stacking frames maximum height is 110".

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

29

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

SIN 711-1

Tile Options Fabric Tiles

• Tiles do not include segment bars — order separately. • 71⁄2"H, 15"H and 30"H tiles are non-dedicated. They can be used in any combination and in combination with other tile sizes. • 30"H tiles can be used as monolithic tiles on 35"H frames. • 421⁄2"H, 50"H and 65"H monolithic tiles are non‑dedicated. • 421⁄2"H tiles can be used as monolithic on a 421⁄2"H frame. • 50"H monolithic tiles are actually 45"H and can be used in any combination with other tiles on a taller frame. • 50"H tiles can be used as monolithic tiles on a 50"H frame. • 65"H monolithic tiles are actually 60"H and can be used in combination with segmented tiles on a frame that is stacked above 65"H. • 65"H tiles can be used as monolithic on a 65"H frame.

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Technology Tile

30

• Receptacle openings with blank covers (1 in 24"W tiles; 2 in wider tiles). Located 303⁄8" above bottom of base raceway. • Tiles do not include segment bars — order separately. • 15"H port tiles can be used on 421⁄2"H or higher frame for data/power access at beltline. • 35"H frames do not have beltline data/power capability. • 30"H port tiles can be used in the base position on 421⁄2"H or higher frames for data/power access at beltline. • Specify the size that matches the frame size. One tile per frame side on 421⁄2"H, 50"H and 65"H. • Technology Tile Power brackets are required, refer to page 45. • Electrical components are sold separately and need to be specified.

Accessories Tiles

• Tiles do not include segment bars — order separately. • Sturdy aluminum extrusion with steel support construction. • Powder-coated for durable finish. • Use in place of standard 15"H tiles. • Cannot be used in the bottom location of a panel frame. • Each tool tile has a suggested weight capacity of 80 lbs. of paper management accessories. • Optional horizontal tile stiffner support can be used to increase the stiffness of interior when using tool tiles and an acoustical tile. See page 40.

Clear & Frosted Glass Tiles

• Tempered safety glass encased within a frame with built-in shrouds. • Single-pane construction, glass is flush on one side. • For use in stacking frames also. • Glass opening is 4" less than nominal heights and widths. • Cannot be used in top tile position of a 421⁄2"H panel frame or any frame with integrated power pole. • Cannot be used at the bottom or beltline location of panel frame. • To utilize Frosted tiles at an uppermost frame position, there must be clearance above the primary or stack-on panel frame equal to, or greater than the height of the Frosted tile. • 30"H tiles will work in top position of 65"H frames and in 30"H stacking frame. Segment bar needs to be ordered

Laminate Tiles

• HPL Laminate coated MDF construction. • Available in ALL HPL options. • Tiles do not ship with segment bars — order separately. • Tiles attach with custom tile bracket kit — included. Specify paint color. • 15"H and 30"H tiles are non-dedicated and can be used in any tile position.

Pass Thru Tiles

• Need to order 71/2"H fabric tiles to enclose the top of the frame when using a pass thru tile. • Will need to specify separately. • Actual height of Pass Thru Tile is 22".

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE

Steel Tiles

EMERGE Steel Tiles

Whiteboard Tiles

PREFIX

• White marker board tile; painted steel surface. • Accepts magnetic accessories. • It is not recommended to use this tile with wall track. • 15"H and 30"H are non-dedicated and can be used in any tile position.

EMERGE

• Tiles do not include segment bars- order separately. • Painted steel construction. • 71/2"H, 15"H and 30"H tiles are non-dedicated and can be used in any tile position. • Do not use this tile with wall track.

REFERENCE

Tile Options Continued...

EMERGE Steel Tiles

WORKSURFACES SURPASS PREPARE STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

31

REFERENCE

EMERGE

SIN 711-1

Worksurfaces

Arc Cutout

Transitional

Half-Round Extension

EMERGE

Rectangular

PREFIX WORKSURFACES SURPASS

Straight Front L-Return

Straight Countertop

90º Corner Countertop

Straight Front Corner

Radius Front Corner

Radius Front Transition Corner

Radius End Peninsula

Grand Peninsula

Curved Peninsula

Radius Front L-Return

Straight Front Transition Corner

“b or d” Shaped Peninsula (“b” Shown)

120 Degree Countertop

120 Degree Worksurface Universal 120 Degree Corner

PREPARE

Worksurface Edge Options

Edgeband (solid)

Edgeband (woodgrain)

Overhead Cabinets and Shelves

Painted Door

Hinged Door

Sliding Steel Door

Ready-to-Assemble Cabinet

*Available with Easy-Assist Option

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

T-Mold

Straight Shelf

32

Ready-to-Assemble Shelf

Upmount Kit

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

Filing & Personal Storage Pedestal Files - Available in File/File or Box/Box/File Options

EMERGE

R-Pull

A-Pull

Systems Pedestal Filer

Mobile Pedestal with Seat Cushion

PREFIX

Personal Storage - Available in R-Pull and A-Pull Options

Lateral Files

Lateral File Laminate Top

Overfile Cabinet

Personal Storage Center

INCLUDE low storage

WORKSURFACES

aznederC nepO EDULCNI

SURPASS PREPARE

Personal Storage Tower

Bookcases

End Tower with Bookcase

Storage Cabinet

STORAGE

Accessories

Letter Tray

Diagonal Tray

Personal Shelf

Binder Bin

File Pocket

ACCESSORIES

Accessory Rail

SEATING

Paper Clip Tray

Tool Box

Paper Clip

Monitor Arms

Dual Monitor Arms

Task Lights

INDEX

Desk Lamps

Keyboard Trays

CPU Holder

Electrical Receptacle

Foot Rest

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

33

WORKSURFACES SURPASS PREPARE STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

SIN 711-1

Typical EMERGE Configurations Typical configurations are commonly ordered layouts shown for planning and budgeting purposes. List pricing for typical configurations is based on Core Laminate and Paint finishes, Grade A Fabric and edgeband finish. Models MUST be ordered individually.

Includes: Core (C) Laminate Core Paint Clear Glass Grade A Fabric Edgeband

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

10x11 EMERGE Private Office MODEL #

DESCRIPTION

QTY LIST $

MODEL #

DESCRIPTION

QTY LIST $

M-FTFB6524R

Emerge Frame-Base 65Hx24W Trim

2

$826

M-FTTS3036F

Emerge Tile 30Hx36W Segmented-Fab Tck

3

$402

M-FTTS6024F

Emerge Tile 60Hx24W Segmented-Fab Tck

2

$420

M-FTFS3036R

Emerge Frame-Stacking 30Hx36W

3

$1,077

M-FTTS3024L

Emerge Tile 30Hx24W Segmented Tile-Laminate

2

$614

M-FTTS3036G

Emerge Tile 30Hx36W Segmented Glass

3

$1,194

M-FTTS3024F

Emerge Tile 30Hx24W Segmented-Fab Tck

6

$708

M-FTSB36

Emerge Tile SegBar 36W

9

$126

M-FTFS3024R

Emerge Frame-Stacking 30Hx24W

2

$684

M-FTTC36

Emerge Topcap 36W

3

$213

M-FTSB24

Emerge Tile SegBar 24W

6

$60

M-FTFB6542R

Emerge Frame-Base 65Hx42W Trim

1

$456

M-FTTC24

Emerge Topcap 24W

2

$96

M-FTTS6042F

Emerge Tile 60Hx42W Segmented-Fab Tck

1

$308

M-FTFB6536R

Emerge Frame-Base 65Hx36W Trim

1

$441

M-FTTS3042L

Emerge Tile 30Hx42W Segmented TileLaminate

1

$348

M-FTTS6036F

Emerge Tile 60Hx36W Segmented-Fab Tck

1

$296

M-FTTS3042F

Emerge Tile 30Hx42W Segmented-Fab Tck

1

$143

M-FTTS3036L

Emerge Tile 30Hx36W Segmented Tile-Laminate

1

$337

M-FTFS3042R

Emerge Frame-Stacking 30Hx42W

1

$379

M-FTTS3036F

Emerge Tile 30Hx36W Segmented-Fab Tck

3

$402

M-FTTS3042G

Emerge Tile 30Hx42W Segmented Glass

1

$435

M-FTFS3036R

Emerge Frame-Stacking 30Hx36W

1

$359

M-FTSB42

Emerge Tile SegBar 42W

3

$48

M-FTSB36

Emerge Tile SegBar 36W

3

$42

M-FTTC42

Emerge Topcap 42W

1

$83

M-FTTC36

Emerge Topcap 36W

1

$71

M-FTDP9542

Emerge Hinged Door/Frm Pkg 95x42 NoHnd RadTrm

1

$3405

M-FTFB6542R

Emerge Frame-Base 65Hx42W Trim

2

$912

M-FTTD0842F

Max F/T Tile 7.5x42 Segmented-Fab Tackable

2

$178

M-DOORLEVER

Hinged Door Lock Set Kit - Polished Silver Lever

1

$359

M-FTTS6042F

Emerge Tile 60Hx42W Segmented-Fab Tck

2

$616

M-FTTS3042L

Emerge Tile 30Hx42W Segmented Tile-Laminate

2

$696

M-ED1

Duplex Outlet Circuit #1

1

$47

M-FTTS3042F

Emerge Tile 30Hx42W Segmented-Fab Tck

6

$858

M-ED4

Duplex Outlet Circuit #4 - Isolated/Dedicated

1

$47

M-FTFS3042R

Emerge Frame-Stacking 30Hx42W

2

$758

M-EH42

Standard Double Block Duplex Harness 42W

2

$540

M-FTSB42

Emerge Tile SegBar 42W

6

$96

M-EP24

Pass-Through Harness 24W

1

$141

M-FTTC42

Emerge Topcap 42W

2

$166

M-EPF2

Power In-Feed through Side Receptacle

1

$301

4

$524

4

$1,168

M-FTFB6536R

Emerge Frame-Base 65Hx36W Trim

4

$1,764

M-FTCPL15

Emerge Conn Post2Way 90Deg L15H StkOn No TopCap

M-FTTS6036F

Emerge Tile 60Hx36W Segmented-Fab Tck

4

$1,184

M-FTCPL80

Emerge Connect Post-2-Way 90Deg L-80H

M-FTTS3036L

Emerge Tile 30Hx36W Segmented Tile-Laminate

4

$1,348

M-USOH1542H

Univ OH Cab 15Hx42W Hinged Pnt Door

1

$1151

M-FTTS3036F

Emerge Tile 30Hx36W Segmented-Fab Tck

4

$536

M-UOSS42

Univ Open Straight Shelf 42W

1

$288

M-FTFS3036R

Emerge Frame-Stacking 30Hx36W

4

$1,436

M-LF230-A

Ridgeline Lateral- 2-Dwr 30W A-Pull

1

$1,403

M-FTTS1536F

Emerge Tile 15Hx36W Segmented-Fab Tck

8

$816

M-PEDSPR6-LH

Pedestal to-Panel Spacer, 6", LH

1

$81

M-FTTS1536G

Emerge Tile 15Hx36W Segmented Glass

4

$1,336

M-MDSL

Maxon Support Leg

1

$195

M-FTSB36

Emerge Tile SegBar 36W

20

$280

M-C1R

Univ Cantilevered Worksurf Bracket RH

1

$59

M-FTTC36

Emerge Topcap 36W

4

$284

M-CWB2

S1K Cantilever W/S Bracket Kit (2 pack)

1

$31

M-UPR3072E

Unv Radius End Peninsula Wksfc 30Dx72W EdgBnd

1

$756

M-FTFB6536R

Emerge Frame-Base 65Hx36W Trim

3

$1,323

M-FTTS6036F

Emerge Tile 60Hx36W Segmented-Fab Tck

3

$888

M-UWR2442E

Univ Wksfc-Rectglr 24Dx42W Edgeband

1

$351

M-FTTS3036L

Emerge Tile 30Hx36W Segmented Tile-Laminate

3

$1,011

M-UWR2484E

Univ Wksfc-Rectglr 24Dx84W Edgeband

1

$570

M-UWSKP

Peninsula Worksurface Support Kit

1

$252

TOTAL EXTENDED LIST: $38,723 34

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

Typical EMERGE Configurations

EMERGE

Typical configurations are commonly ordered layouts shown for planning and budgeting purposes. List pricing for typical configurations is based on Core Laminate and Paint finishes, Grade A Fabric and edgeband finish. Models MUST be ordered individually.

PREFIX

Includes: WORKSURFACES

Core (C) Laminate Core Paint Grade A Fabric Edgeband

SURPASS

MODEL #

DESCRIPTION

QTY LIST $

MODEL #

DESCRIPTION

QTY LIST $

Emerge Frame-Base 42Hx30W Trim

2

$804

M-EP30

Pass-Through Harness 30W

1

$156

M-FTTS3730F

Emerge Tile 37Hx30W Segmented-Fab Tck

2

$350

M-EP42

Pass-Through Harness 42W

1

$170

M-FTTS3730L

Emerge Tile 37Hx30W Segmented Tile-Laminate

2

$696

M-EPF2

Power In-Feed through Side Receptacle

1

$301

M-FTTC30

Emerge Topcap 30W

2

$118

M-FTCPL42

Emerge Connect Post-2-Way 90Deg L-42H

2

$370

M-FTFB4236R

Emerge Frame-Base 42Hx36W Trim

2

$822

M-FTCPL65

Emerge Connect Post-2-Way 90Deg L-65H

2

$524

M-FTTS3736F

Emerge Tile 37Hx36W Segmented-Fab Tck

2

$376

M-FTETF42

Emerge End of Run Panel Trim 42H

1

$119

Emerge Tile 37Hx36W Segmented Tile-Laminate

2

$724

M-FTETF65

Emerge End of Run Panel Trim 65H

1

$159

Emerge Topcap 36W

4

$284

M-FTETFV22

Emerge Variable Height Panel End Trim 22H

1

$140

M-FTFB4242R

Emerge Frame-Base 42Hx42W Trim

1

$422

M-USOH1572F

Univ OH Cab 15Hx72W Flipper Pnt Door

1

$1,058

M-FTTS3742F

Emerge Tile 37Hx42W Segmented-Fab Tck

1

$197

M-ESP20B-A

Ridgeline Pedestal 20D BBF Stationry A-Pull

1

$894

M-FTTS3742L

Emerge Tile 37Hx42W Segmented Tile-Laminate

1

$380

M-ESP20F-A

Ridgeline Pedestal 20D FF Stationry A-Pull

1

$894

M-FTTC42

Emerge Topcap 42W

1

$83

M-MDSL

Maxon Support Leg

1

$195

Emerge Frame-Base 65Hx24W Trim

2

$826

M-C1L

Univ Cantilevered Worksurf Bracket LH

1

$59

Emerge Tile 60Hx24W Segmented-Fab Tck

4

$840

M-CWB2

S1K Cantilever W/S Bracket Kit (2 pack)

4

$124

M-FTTC24

Emerge Topcap 24W

2

$96

M-FTCT1572E

Straight Countertop 15Dx72W WITH SUPPORT

1

$745

Emerge Frame-Base 65Hx36W Trim

2

$882

M-UWR2442E

Univ Wksfc-Rectglr 24Dx42W Edgeband

1

$351

Emerge Tile 60Hx36W Segmented-Fab Tck

4

$1,184

M-UWR2472E

Univ Wksfc-Rectglr 24Dx72W Edgeband

1

$494

M-UWR3072E

Univ Wksfc-Rectglr 30Dx72W Edgeband

1

$533

M-ED1

Duplex Outlet Circuit #1

1

$47

M-ED4

Duplex Outlet Circuit #4 - Isolated/Dedicated

1

$47

M-EH36

Standard Double Block Duplex Harness 36W

2

$520

M-EP24

Pass-Through Harness 24W

1

$141

INDEX

M-FTFB6536R M-FTTS6036F

SEATING

M-FTFB6524R M-FTTS6024F

ACCESSORIES

M-FTTS3736L M-FTTC36

STORAGE

M-FTFB4230R

PREPARE

6x8 EMERGE Reception Station

TOTAL EXTENDED LIST: $17,125 *Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

35

SIN 711-1

Typical EMERGE Configurations

Typical configurations are commonly ordered layouts shown for planning and budgeting purposes. List pricing for typical configurations is based on Core Laminate and Paint finishes, Grade A Fabric and edgeband finish. Models MUST be ordered individually.

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

Includes:

EMERGE Benching MODEL #

DESCRIPTION

QTY LIST $

MODEL #

DESCRIPTION

QTY LIST $

Emerge Frame-Base 42Hx24W Trim

8

$3,128

M-EH60

Standard Double Block Duplex Harness 60W

3

$900

M-FTTS3724F

Emerge Tile 37Hx24W Segmented-Fab Tck

16

$2,640

M-EPF2

Power In-Feed through Side Receptacle

1

$301

M-FTTC24

Emerge Topcap 24W

8

$384

M-FTCPT42

Emerge Connect Post-3-Way 180Deg T-42H

2

$392

M-FTFB4260R

Emerge Frame-Base 42Hx60W Trim

3

$1,317

M-FTCPX42

Emerge Connect Post-4-Way X-42H

2

$356

M-FTTS3760F

Emerge Tile 37Hx60W Segmented-Fab Tck

6

$1,320

M-FTETF42

Emerge End of Run Panel Trim 42H

8

$952

M-FTFG0760

Emerge Frameless Glass 7Hx60W

3

$2,445

M-ESM24BF-A

Short Mobile Pedestal - 23"D BF A-pull

6

$4,218

M-ED1

Duplex Outlet Circuit #1

6

$282

M-ESM24SEAT

Pedestal Seat Cushion 23"D x 15"W

6

$1,848

M-ED4

Duplex Outlet Circuit #4 - Isolated/Dedicated

6

$282

M-CWB2

S1K Cantilever W/S Bracket Kit (2 pack)

12

$372

M-EH24

Standard Single Block Duplex Harness 24W

1

$203

M-UWR2460E

Univ Wksfc-Rectglr 24Dx60W Edgeband

6

$2,508

36

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SEATING

M-FTFB4224R

INDEX

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

Core (C) Laminate Core Paint Clear Glass Grade A Fabric Edgeband

TOTAL EXTENDED LIST: $23,848

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

Typical EMERGE Configurations

EMERGE

Typical configurations are commonly ordered layouts shown for planning and budgeting purposes. List pricing for typical configurations is based on Core Laminate and Paint finishes, Grade A Fabric and edgeband finish. Models MUST be ordered individually.

PREFIX WORKSURFACES SURPASS

Includes: Core (C) Laminate Core Paint Grade A Fabric Edgeband

PREPARE

6x6 EMERGE Single Station DESCRIPTION Emerge Frame-Base 50Hx24W Trim

QTY LIST $ 2

$804

MODEL # M-ED4

M-FTTS3024F

Emerge Tile 30Hx24W Segmented-Fab Tck

4

$472

M-EH36

DESCRIPTION

QTY LIST $

Duplex Outlet Circuit #4 - Isolated/Dedicated

1

$47

Standard Double Block Duplex Harness 36W

2

$520

Emerge Tile 15Hx24W Segmented-Fab Tck

4

$356

M-EPF2

Power In-Feed through Side Receptacle

1

$301

Emerge Tile SegBar 24W

4

$40

M-FTCPL50

Emerge Connect Post-2-Way 90Deg L-50H

3

$714

M-FTTC24

Emerge Topcap 24W

2

$96

M-FTETF50

Emerge End of Run Panel Trim 50H

2

$280

M-FTFB5036R

Emerge Frame-Base 50Hx36W Trim

4

$1,692

M-USOH1536F

Univ OH Cab 15Hx36W Flipper Pnt Door

1

$586

M-FTTS3036F

Emerge Tile 30Hx36W Segmented-Fab Tck

8

$1,072

M-USUM36

Univ OH Upmont 36W

1

$257

1

$591

Emerge Tile 15Hx36W Segmented-Fab Tck

8

$816

M-SYP20B-A

M-FTSB36

Emerge Tile SegBar 36W

8

$112

M-C1R

Univ Cantilevered Worksurf Bracket RH

1

$59

M-FTTC36

Emerge Topcap 36W

4

$284

M-CWB2

S1K Cantilever W/S Bracket Kit (2 pack)

2

$62

M-ED1

Duplex Outlet Circuit #1

1

$47

M-UCREL243672E Unv L-Rtrn LH Wksfc 2436Dx72W RadFrt EdgBd

1

$818

M-UWR2436E

Univ Wksfc-Rectglr 24Dx36W Edgeband

1

$336

M-UWSKC

Corner Worksurface Support Kit

1

$123

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

TOTAL EXTENDED LIST: $10,485

SEATING

M-FTTS1536F

Sys & Desk Univ Pedestal 20Dx15Wx28H BBF A-Pull

ACCESSORIES

M-FTTS1524F M-FTSB24

STORAGE

MODEL # M-FTFB5024R

37

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE Base Frame Includes ∙∙ Base frame, raceway covers, and attaching hardware.

Notes ∙∙ For Specification Details refer to pages 21-37. ∙∙ Top Cap ordered separately.

Description

Frame-Base, 421/2" Height

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Frame-Base, 35" Height

Frame-Base, 50" Height

Frame-Base, 65" Height

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FTFB3524R

35"

24"

15.7

1.7

383

M-FTFB3530R M-FTFB3536R M-FTFB3542R M-FTFB3548R M-FTFB3560R

35" 35" 35" 35" 35"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

18.9 21.2 23.6 26 30.8

2.1 2.4 2.8 3.2 4.0

390 400 408 420 429

M-FTFB4224R

42.5"

24"

20.1

2.0

391

M-FTFB4230R M-FTFB4236R M-FTFB4242R M-FTFB4248R M-FTFB4260R

42.5" 42.5" 42.5" 42.5" 42.5"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

23.1 26 28.9 31.8 37.7

2.4 2.9 3.4 3.8 4.7

402 411 422 432 439

M-FTFB5024R

50"

24"

22.2

2.3

402

M-FTFB5030R M-FTFB5036R M-FTFB5042R M-FTFB5048R M-FTFB5060R

50" 50" 50" 50" 50"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

25.2 28 31 33.9 40.3

2.9 3.4 4.0 4.5 5.6

413 423 434 445 456

M-FTFB6524R

65"

24"

24.7

3.0

413

M-FTFB6530R M-FTFB6536R M-FTFB6542R M-FTFB6548R M-FTFB6560R

65" 65" 65" 65" 65"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

27.8 30.6 33.6 36.5 42.3

3.7 4.4 5.1 5.8 7.2

426 441 456 461 473

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

SIN 711-1

38

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

Stacking Frames Includes ∙∙ Stacking frame and attaching hardware.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ For specification details refer to pages 21-37. ∙∙ Top Cap ordered separately. ∙∙ Paint finish option not required.

Frame-Stacking, 15" Height

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FTFS1524R M-FTFS1530R M-FTFS1536R M-FTFS1542R M-FTFS1548R M-FTFS1560R

15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

8 10 12 14 16 20

0.7 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.8

314 322 329 337 348 354

M-FTFS3024R

30"

24"

8

1.4

342

M-FTFS3030R M-FTFS3036R M-FTFS3042R M-FTFS3048R M-FTFS3060R

30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

10 12 14 16 20

1.8 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.4

350 359 379 386 404

SURPASS

H

WORKSURFACES

Frame-Stacking, 30" Height

Model

PREFIX

Description

PREPARE STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

39

REFERENCE

EMERGE

SIN 711-1

Frames-Horizontal Stiffener Support Includes Notes ∙∙ Used to increase stiffness of larger Fabric Tiles when Fabric Tiles are used on both sides. ∙∙ Includes attaching Hardware with black paint finish.

Description

Model

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

EMERGE Frame-Horizontal Stiffener Support

M-FTFH24R M-FTFH30R M-FTFH36R M-FTFH42R M-FTFH48R M-FTFH60R

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

2 2 3 3 3 4

0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7

83 96 102 121 134 147

Floor Mounting & Channel Brackets Includes ∙∙ Floor Mounting Track with two brackets.

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Specify track width matched to each panel width. 6" size is intended to anchor one edge each of two adjoining panels. Floor attachment hardware is not included. For use when panels need to be anchored to floor.

Description EMERGE Floor Mounting & Channel Brackets

Model M-EMFMC06 M-EMFMC12 M-EMFMC24 M-EMFMC30 M-EMFMC36 M-EMFMC42 M-EMFMC48

n n n n n n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

6" 12" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48"

.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1 1.1

0.1 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4

19 24 33 38 40 41 43

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Horizontal Stiffener Support

40

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

Sliding Door Includes ∙∙ Sliding Door, two hang rail assemblies and two door stop brackets.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Door available in frosted acrylic only. Door actual measurements: 66"H x 39"W x 2"D. For attaching to 30", 36", 42" or 48" wide panels order a Sliding Door Mounting Kit. For specifying EMERGE sliding door, see page 26.

PREFIX

Description

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

50"

42"

53

5.5

1752

M-FTSD6542

65"

42"

53

7.1

80"

42"

53 0.5

8.7 0.4

1826 1897

EMERGE Sliding Door Kit

M-FTSD8042 M-FTSDKIT30 M-FTSDKIT36

0.5

0.5

254

M-FTSDKIT42

0.5

0.5

271

M-FTSDKIT48

0.5

0.6

281

239

SURPASS

H

M-FTSD5042

WORKSURFACES

Model

EMERGE Sliding Door

PREPARE

Hinged Door/Frame Package Includes ∙∙ Door panel frame, front door, hinges, top cap, attaching hardware.

STORAGE

Notes Used with adjacent 95” or taller panels. Door handle ordered separately. Power pole may not be used with Door panels. Keyed alike option not available on Door panels. Door panel is non-handed. For left or right hand: change to desired swing at time of installation. For every door panel, (2) 8"H fabric tiles need to be ordered.

EMERGE Hinged Door/Frame Package Hinged Door Lock Set Kit

Model

H

W

D

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FTDP9542 M-DOORLEVER

95" 6"

42" 10"

4

155 2

9.8 0.1

3405 359

SEATING

Description

ACCESSORIES

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

41

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

SIN 711-1

Fabric Tiles Includes ∙∙ Fabric Tile

Notes ∙∙ Fabric Tiles are tackable and acoustical. ∙∙ Occupies one side of the panel frame. Order additional tile(s) for the opposite side of the

frame.

PREFIX

∙∙ Refer to Tile Position Options Chart.

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

71/2"H Tile Monolithic Base-Fabric Tackable

M-FTTS0724F M-FTTS0730F M-FTTS0736F M-FTTS0742F M-FTTS0748F M-FTTS0760F

7.5" 7.5" 7.5" 7.5" 7.5" 7.5"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

2 2 2 3 2 3

0.4 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.9

77 81 85 89 93 95

4 4 4 4 5 6

15"H Tile Monolithic Base-Fabric Tackable

M-FTTS1524F M-FTTS1530F M-FTTS1536F M-FTTS1542F M-FTTS1548F M-FTTS1560F

15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

1 1.3 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.6

0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2

89 95 102 112 116 122

4 4 4 5 5 6

30"H Tile Monolithic Base-Fabric Tackable

STORAGE

M-FTTS3024F M-FTTS3030F M-FTTS3036F M-FTTS3042F M-FTTS3048F M-FTTS3060F

30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5

0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4

118 128 134 143 151 159

4 5 6 6 7 7

371/2"H Tile Monolithic Base-Fabric Tackable

M-FTTS3724F M-FTTS3730F M-FTTS3736F M-FTTS3742F M-FTTS3748F M-FTTS3760F

37.5" 37.5" 37.5" 37.5" 37.5" 37.5"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5

0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4

165 175 188 197 208 220

6 6 7 7 8 9

45"H Tile Monolithic Base-Fabric Tackable

M-FTTS4524F M-FTTS4530F M-FTTS4536F M-FTTS4542F M-FTTS4548F M-FTTS4560F

45" 45" 45" 45" 45" 45"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5

0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4

194 242 260 276 296 316

8 9 11 11 12 13

60"H Tile Monolithic Base-Fabric Tackable

M-FTTS6024F M-FTTS6030F M-FTTS6036F M-FTTS6042F M-FTTS6048F M-FTTS6060F

60" 60" 60" 60" 60" 60"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5

0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4

210 282 296 308 322 337

9 10 12 13 14 15

INDEX

SEATING

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Model

ACCESSORIES

Grade A Grade B List List

Description

42

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

Pass Thru Tile Includes

EMERGE

∙∙ Open base tile frame

Notes ∙∙ Need to order (2) 7 ½”H fabric tiles to enclose the top of the frame when using a pass

thru tile. Specify separately.

Description

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FTTS3024PT

22.5"

24"

6.8

0.3

262

M-FTTS3030PT M-FTTS3036PT M-FTTS3042PT M-FTTS3048PT M-FTTS3060PT

22.5" 22.5" 22.5" 22.5" 22.5"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

7.9 9.1 10.2 11.4 12.6

0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.7

279 293 311 327 363

WORKSURFACES

EMERGE Tile 221/2"H Monolith Base Tile-OPEN

PREFIX

∙∙ Actual height of pass thru tile is 22½. ∙∙ Primarily used for accessing existing power and data on a hard wall.

SURPASS PREPARE

Accessory Tile Includes ∙∙ Accessory Tile assembly

STORAGE

Notes ∙∙ The Accessory Tile will fit into an EMERGE frame like a standard fabric or laminate tile. ∙∙ It has nine height options to place accessories. ∙∙ Accessory tile can be installed in any 15” segment position.

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

24” 30” 36” 42” 48” 60”

10 12 14 16 19 23

0.8 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.8

460 488 531 564 594 626

SEATING

Model M-FTTS1524ACC M-FTTS1530ACC M-FTTS1536ACC M-FTTS1542ACC M-FTTS1548ACC M-FTTS1560ACC

ACCESSORIES

Description EMERGE Accessory Tile

INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

43

SIN 711-1

Technology Tiles Includes ∙∙ Technology Tile with factory installed attachment hardware. ∙∙ Receptacle openings with blank covers (one in 24" wide tiles: two in wider tiles).

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Technology Tiles may only be used in the base position of panel frame. Technology Tiles are tackable and acoustical. Occupies one side of the panel frame. Order additional tile(s) for the opposite side of the frame. Refer to Tile Position Options Chart. Do not specify a 30"H base tile with a 15" technology tile above it. This will not work because the knockouts do not align with the frame beltline.

Description 15"H SEGMENTED Tile-Technology

30"H Tile Monolithic Base-Technology

371/2"H Tile Monolithic Base-Technology

45"H Tile Monolithic Base-Technology

60"H Tile Monolithic Base-Technology

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

Grade A Grade B List List

M-FTTS1524T

15"

24"

1.1

0.2

242

4

M-FTTS1530T M-FTTS1536T M-FTTS1542T M-FTTS1548T M-FTTS1560T

15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

1.4 1.7 2 2.2 2.7

0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4

252 257 267 276 289

4 4 5 5 6

M-FTTS3024T

30"

24"

3.1

0.3

265

4

M-FTTS3030T M-FTTS3036T M-FTTS3042T M-FTTS3048T M-FTTS3060T

30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

3.9 4.7 5.3 6.1 7.6

0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.7

277 409 315 368 381

5 6 6 7 7

M-FTTS3724T

37.5"

24"

3.1

0.3

316

6

M-FTTS3730T M-FTTS3736T M-FTTS3742T M-FTTS3748T M-FTTS3760T

37.5" 37.5" 37.5" 37.5" 37.5"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

3.9 4.7 5.3 6.1 7.6

0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.7

367 383 399 416 436

6 7 7 8 9

M-FTTS4524T

45"

24"

4.1

0.4

336

8

M-FTTS4530T M-FTTS4536T M-FTTS4542T M-FTTS4548T M-FTTS4560T

45" 45" 45" 45" 45"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

5.1 6.1 7 8 10

0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.9

404 416 431 450 468

9 11 11 12 13

M-FTTS6024T M-FTTS6030T M-FTTS6036T M-FTTS6042T M-FTTS6048T M-FTTS6060T

60" 60" 60" 60" 60" 60"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

5.2 6.5 7.8 9 10.3 12.9

0.4 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.1

367 434 457 479 487 506

9 10 12 13 14 15

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

44

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

Technology Tile Power Brackets Includes ∙∙ 12 Technology Tile Power Brackets.

EMERGE

Notes For use with Technology Tiles (at Beltline Only). 1 Bracket required at Beltline for each pass-through harness and 24" wide Power Harness. 2 Brackets required for 30" to 60" wide Power Harnesses. Refer to page 30 for Technology Tile spec rules.

Description

Model

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FTTPB

3

0.2

129

WORKSURFACES

Tech Tile Power Brackets-Pkg of 12

PREFIX

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

SURPASS PREPARE STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

45

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

SIN 711-1

Steel Tiles Includes ∙∙ Steel Tile

Notes ∙∙ Occupies one side of the panel frame. Order additional tile(s) for the opposite side

of the frame.

EMERGE Steel Tiles

Description

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

7.5"H SEGMENTED Tile- Steel

M-FTTS0724S

7.5"

24"

11.4

0.4

150

M-FTTS0730S M-FTTS0736S M-FTTS0742S M-FTTS0748S M-FTTS0760S M-FTTS1524S M-FTTS1530S M-FTTS1536S M-FTTS1542S M-FTTS1548S M-FTTS1560S M-FTTS3024S M-FTTS3030S M-FTTS3036S M-FTTS3042S M-FTTS3048S M-FTTS3060S

7.5" 7.5" 7.5" 7.5" 7.5" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

13.5 15.5 17.6 20.7 24.8 11.4 13.5 15.5 17.6 20.7 24.8 14.5 16.6 18.6 20.7 23.8 25.9

0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.9 0.1 0.1 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.8 1.4 1.7 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.4

160 170 180 190 200 170 180 190 200 210 230 200 215 230 250 270 300

15"H SEGMENTED Tile- Steel

30"H SEGMENTED Tile- Steel

List

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

∙∙ Refer to Tile Position Options Chart.

46

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

Whiteboard Tiles Includes ∙∙ Whiteboard Tile

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Occupies one side of the panel frame. Order additional tile(s) for the opposite

side of the frame. ∙∙ Refer to Tile Position Options Chart. ∙∙ This surface is a dry erase application.

M-FTTS0730W M-FTTS0736W M-FTTS0742W M-FTTS0748W M-FTTS0760W M-FTTS1524W M-FTTS1530W M-FTTS1536W M-FTTS1542W M-FTTS1548W M-FTTS1560W M-FTTS3024W M-FTTS3030W M-FTTS3036W M-FTTS3042W M-FTTS3048W M-FTTS3060W

15"H SEGMENTED Tile- Whiteboard

30"H SEGMENTED Tile- Whiteboard

Wt.

Cubes

List

7.5"

24"

11.4

0.4

160

7.5" 7.5" 7.5" 7.5" 7.5" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

13.5 15.5 17.6 20.7 24.8 11.4 13.5 15.5 17.6 20.7 24.8 14.5 16.6 18.6 20.7 23.8 25.9

0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.9 0.1 0.1 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.8 1.4 1.7 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.4

170 180 190 200 220 180 190 200 220 240 270 240 260 280 300 320 360

PREPARE

M-FTTS0724W

W

SURPASS

7.5"H SEGMENTED Tile- Whiteboard

H

WORKSURFACES

Model

PREFIX

EMERGE White Board

Description

STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

47

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

SIN 711-1

Laminate Tiles Includes ∙∙ Laminate Tile and Tile Kit with factory installed attachment clips.

Notes ∙∙ Laminate tile ships pre-assembled, including tile, tracks and clips. ∙∙ Available in all widths AND up to 37 ½” high. NO MONOLITHIC option available on frames over

PREFIX

421/2” tall. Segmented tiles can be used for a full laminate panel look if desired. ∙∙ Occupies one side of the panel frame. Order additional tile(s) for the opposite side of the frame. ∙∙ Refer to Tile Position Options Chart.

EMERGE 15"H Monolithic Base Laminate Tile

EMERGE 30"H Monolithic Base Laminate Tile

EMERGE 371/2"H Monolithic Base Laminate Tile

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

Core List

M-FTTS1524L

15"

24"

6

1.6

238

M-FTTS1530L M-FTTS1536L M-FTTS1542L M-FTTS1548L M-FTTS1560L

15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

7 8 10 12 14

1.9 2.2 2.5 2.9 3.7

251 263 272 283 296

M-FTTS3024L

30"

24"

6

1.6

307

M-FTTS3030L M-FTTS3036L M-FTTS3042L M-FTTS3048L M-FTTS3060L

30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

7 8 10 12 14

1.9 2.2 2.5 2.9 3.7

320 337 348 362 380

M-FTTS3724L

371/2"

24"

6

1.6

337

M-FTTS3730L M-FTTS3736L M-FTTS3742L M-FTTS3748L M-FTTS3760L

37 " 371/2" 371/2" 371/2" 371/2"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

7 8 10 12 14

1.9 2.2 2.5 2.9 3.7

348 362 380 396 434

1/2

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Description

48

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

Clear & Frosted Glass Tiles Includes ∙∙ Single pane of tempered safety glass encased in a painted steel frame.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Cannot be used in the base position on the panel frame. ∙∙ One Segmented Frosted Tile occupies both sides of a frame. ∙∙ Refer to Tile Position Options Chart.

EMERGE 15"H Glass Tile

H

W

Wt.

Cubes Clear Glass Frosted List Glass List

15"

24"

18

0.8

305

40

15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

23 27 32 36 46

0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.8

319 334 350 364 385

48 54 60 65 75

M-FTTS3024G

30"

24"

23

1.4

360

60

M-FTTS3030G M-FTTS3036G M-FTTS3042G M-FTTS3048G M-FTTS3060G

30" 30" 30" 30" 26"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

29 34 39 44 53

1.8 2.1 2.4 2.9 3.4

378 398 435 455 473

65 70 75 85 95

SURPASS

M-FTTS1524G M-FTTS1530G M-FTTS1536G M-FTTS1542G M-FTTS1548G M-FTTS1560G

WORKSURFACES

EMERGE 30"H Glass Tile

Model

PREFIX

Description

PREPARE STORAGE

Segment Bars Notes Segment bars are horizontal steel cross members. Black only. Must be ordered for placement between all vertically adjacent tiles. Segment bars must be ordered for each side of the panel frame.

Description

ACCESSORIES

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Model

Wt.

Cubes

List

2

0.3

10

M-FTSB30

2

0.3

12

EMERGE Segment Bar 36W"

M-FTSB36

3

0.4

14

EMERGE Segment Bar 42W"

M-FTSB42

3

0.4

16

EMERGE Segment Bar 48W"

M-FTSB48

3

0.5

18

EMERGE Segment Bar 60W"

M-FTSB60

4

0.6

22

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

M-FTSB24

SEATING

EMERGE Segment Bar 24W" EMERGE Segment Bar 30W"

49

SIN 711-1

Panel Connector Posts Includes ∙∙ Top cap, connectors, vertical cover, light block and attaching hardware (for "L", "S", "T", "V" & "Y"). ∙∙ Top cap, light block, attaching hardware and connectors (for "X" Connector Posts).

Notes ∙∙ Each Connection Post adds 2 3/4" to panel run. ∙∙ Refer to EMERGE Connection Post examples.

Description EMERGE Connection Post 2-Way 90° "L"

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

EMERGE Connection Post 3-Way "T"

H

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FTCPL07

7"

1

0.1

114

M-FTCPL15 M-FTCPL22 M-FTCPL30 M-FTCPL35 M-FTCPL42 M-FTCPL50 M-FTCPL65 M-FTCPL80

15" 22" 30" 35" 42" 50" 65" 80"

2 2 3 3 4 5 6 6

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8

131 148 167 161 185 238 262 292

M-FTCPS07

7"

1

0.1

130

M-FTCPS15 M-FTCPS22 M-FTCPS30 M-FTCPS35

15" 22" 30" 35"

2 2 3 3

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.3

155 171 189 181

M-FTCPS42

42"

4

0.4

238

M-FTCPS50 M-FTCPS65 M-FTCPS80

50" 65" 80"

6 7 7

0.5 0.6 0.8

318 372 420

M-FTCPT07

7"

1

0.1

120

M-FTCPT15 M-FTCPT22 M-FTCPT30 M-FTCPT35 M-FTCPT42 M-FTCPT50

15" 22" 30" 35" 42" 50"

2 2 3 3 4 5

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5

140 160 175 162 196 249

M-FTCPT65

65"

6

0.6

281

M-FTCPT80

80"

6

0.8

310

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

EMERGE Connection Post 2-Way 180° "S"

Model

50

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE

Description EMERGE Connection Post 4-Way "X"

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FTCPX07

7"

1

0.1

110

M-FTCPX15 M-FTCPX22 M-FTCPX30 M-FTCPX35

15" 22" 30" 35"

2 2 3 3

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.3

128 145 160 150

M-FTCPX42

42"

4

0.4

178

M-FTCPX50

50"

6

0.5

230

7

0.6

250

7

0.8

285

M-FTCPY235

35"

3

0.3

176

M-FTCPY242 M-FTCPY250 M-FTCPY265

42" 50" 65"

4 5 6

0.4 0.5 0.6

202 259 285

M-FTCPY335

35"

3

0.3

181

M-FTCPY342

42"

4.0

0.4

221

M-FTCPY350

50"

5.0

0.5

283

M-FTCPY365

65"

6.0

0.6

328

SURPASS

65" 80"

WORKSURFACES

M-FTCPX65 M-FTCPX80

PREFIX

EMERGE Connection Post 3-Way "Y"

H

EMERGE

EMERGE Connection Post 2-Way "V"

Model

REFERENCE

Panel Connector Posts Continued...

PREPARE STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

51

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

SIN 711-1

Panel Trim Includes ∙∙ Top cap, end vertical trim cover.

Notes ∙∙ Variable Height End-of-Run Trim is used on "L", "X", "T", "V", "Y", & "S" connections where there is a

change of height.

PREFIX

∙∙ Refer to EMERGE Connection Post examples. ∙∙ Variable Height Frameless Glass End Trim is used when frameless glass is inline with variable height

connector.

EMERGE End-of-Run Trim (E)

EMERGE Variable Height End of Run Trim (FV)

Variable Height Frameless Glass End Trim

INDEX

H

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FTETF15

15"

1

0.1

83

M-FTETF30 M-FTETF35 M-FTETF42 M-FTETF50 M-FTETF65

30" 35" 42" 50" 65"

2 2 2 3 4

0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6

94 101 119 140 159

M-FTETF80

80"

4

0.8

180

M-FTETFV07

7"

1

0.1

97

M-FTETFV15 M-FTETFV22

15" 22"

1 2

0.1 0.2

108 140

M-FTETFV30

30"

2

0.3

192

M-FTETFC07

7"

1

0.1

112

M-FTETFC15

15"

1

0.1

147

Includes ∙∙ Wall Starter Kit and Top Cap.

Notes ∙∙ For applications over 70" H order additional Wall Starter Kits. ∙∙ Kit adds 3/4" to length of panel run. ∙∙ Hardware to attach connector to wall not included.

Description Wall Starter Kit

52

Model

Wall Starter Kit

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Description

Model

H

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FTWSK15 M-FTWSK30 M-FTWSK35 M-FTWSK42 M-FTWSK50 M-FTWSK65

15" 30" 35" 42" 50" 65"

3 3 4 4 5 5

0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6

112 147 177 208 239 274

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

EMERGE Frameless Glass Includes ∙∙ Frameless Glass Stacker and side caps.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ EMERGE Frameless Glass has the ability to do Variable Height applications. ∙∙ Frameless Glass can span multiple panels. ∙∙ Unit itself serves as the top cap.

Cubes

List

Glass Upcharge

EMERGE Frameless Glass, 7" height

M-FTFG0724 M-FTFG0730 M-FTFG0736 M-FTFG0742 M-FTFG0748 M-FTFG0754 M-FTFG0760 M-FTFG0766 M-FTFG0772

7" 7" 7" 7" 7" 7" 7" 7" 7"

24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72

17.6 17.6 21.2 24.8 28.4 28.4 34.8 34.8 42.4

0.6 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.9

558 614 636 676 721 754 792 854 890

574 632 654 695 742 776 815 878 915

EMERGE Frameless Glass, 15" height

M-FTFG1524 M-FTFG1530 M-FTFG1536 M-FTFG1542 M-FTFG1548

15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

24 30 36 42 48

28.0 28.0 33.6 39.2 44.8

1.5 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.3

588 664 707 783 855

605 683 727 805 879

M-FTFG1554

15"

54

44.8

2.3

945

972

M-FTFG1560 M-FTFG1566 M-FTFG1572

15" 15" 15"

60 66 72

56.0 56.0 67.2

2.8 2.8 3.5

998 1051 1093

1026 1081 1124

STORAGE

Top Cap Includes ∙∙ Top Cap

ACCESSORIES

Notes

Top Trim – Painted

• Use to finish top on base panel frames. • It is possible to span multiple frames when the combined frame width is equal to the top trim width. • Available in painted metal. • Top caps are to be ordered separately from the panel frames.

H

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FTTC24 M-FTTC30 M-FTTC36 M-FTTC42 M-FTTC48 M-FTTC60

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

2 2 2 3 3 4

0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6

48 59 71 83 95 107

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

Model

SEATING

Description Topcap

PREPARE

Wt.

SURPASS

W

WORKSURFACES

H

PREFIX

Model

Description

53

SIN 711-1

Electrical Specification Information A

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

PREFIX

F

C

D

E

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

B

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

G

54

A. Power & Data Feeds

F. G. Cable Management Flexibility

Power and communication lines can be fed directly from the ceiling into the top of an EMERGE panel (via EMERGE Integrated Power Pole). Power and data can be accessed from the base raceway via the wall or the floor.

Lay-in cabling allows easy access and easy changes either through the EMERGE top channel or hinged raceway.

B. Extensive Cable Routing Capabilities EMERGE panels offer extensive cable routing capabilities through the top channel, beltline or raceway.

EMERGE Cabling Capacity Power Pole

Electrical harnesses come in standard double two-sided harness (8 outlet capacity) or single two-side harness (4 outlet capacity).

75 data cables

Data with Power

66 data cables

Top Channel Raceway

C. D. Multiple Electrical Outlet Options

Data Only

Beltline

7 data cables Data Only

56 data cables

Data with Power

18 data cables

Data Only

62 data cables

Data with Power

42 data cables *cables are at 60% fill ratio

E. Accessible Worksurface Power EMERGE technology tiles allow for easy, one-step access to power and data at desktop height for cell phones, laptops and other frequently used devices. Also meets ADA requirements.

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE

∙∙ EMERGE features a Byrne 4-circuit/8-wire modular power distribution system. The standard power configuration provides

∙∙ ∙∙

∙∙

EMERGE

∙∙

three utility circuits, which share a common Neutral and Ground, plus an isolated/dedicated fourth circuit, with an independent Neutral and Ground. As an option, the system can also provide 2 utility circuits + 2 isolated circuits. The power distribution system provides access to multiple electrical outlets and circuits within the same panel. The standard power distribution through the base-level raceway can branch electrical service up to the work surface level as needed. Each electrical circuit is rated 120volts/20amp. Up to four 20 Amp circuits may be accessed from a 3-phase power source, and up to three circuits may be used with a single-phase source. The electrical system is UL LISTED.

REFERENCE

Byrne Electrical System Capabilities

NOTE ON THE SPECIFICATION AND INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Guidelines For Byrne Electrical Specification 1.

Consult with the electrician and computer support staff to determine the electrical option you will be using: 3 utility circuits + 1 isolated/dedicated circuit. 2 utility circuits + 2 isolated/dedicated circuit. Determine the requirements (if any) for isolated/dedicated circuits.

4.

Specify the appropriate double block, single block and pass-through power harnesses. Harness widths must correspond to the applicable panel width. The integrated panel-to-panel power jumper cable stretches approximately 3" to transverse 2-way 180° "S", 2-way 90° “L”, 3-way “T” and 4-way “X” connections.

5.

Determine the location, quantity and type of power source feed(s) needed. M-ED1 CIRCUIT 1

NEUTRAL-2 NEUTRAL-1 ISOLATED GROUND GROUND

M-ED4 CIRCUIT 4 M-ED3 ISOLATED/ CIRCUIT 3 DEDICATED

STORAGE

GRAY WHITE GREEN/ YELLOW GREEN PINK

M-ED2 CIRCUIT 2

HOT-4 HOT-3

RED

HOT-2

BLACK

HOT-1

3 utility circuits + 1 isolated/dedicated circuit is the standard configuration of the EMERGE electrical system.

GRAY

M-ED2 CIRCUIT 2

SEATING

M-ED1 CIRCUIT 1

M-ED3 M-ED4 CIRCUIT 3 CIRCUIT 4 ISOLATED/ ISOLATED/ DEDICATED DEDICATED

ACCESSORIES

BLUE

NEUTRAL-2 NEUTRAL-1 ISOLATED GROUND GROUND

PINK

HOT-4

BLUE

HOT-3

RED

HOT-2

BLACK

HOT-1

INDEX

WHITE GREEN/ YELLOW GREEN

PREPARE

Determine the locations, quantities and circuits of the duplex outlets.

3.

SURPASS

2.

WORKSURFACES

All electrical installation work on Maxon power systems should be done under the supervision of a licensed electrician or approved electrical contractor.

PREFIX

The Maxon 4-Circuit/8-Wire power system conforms to National Electrical Code requirements. However, some variations may exist in the local authority of electrical code standards. The specifier or user is responsible for confirming code standard compliance in these locations before specification and ordering. The availability of power components and systems does not constitute local code approved by Maxon Furniture Inc.

2 utility circuits + 2 isolated/dedicated circuits provide the convenience of ample utility power with an additional isolated circuit for more extensive computer applications. *Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

55

SIN 711-1

Maximum Receptacle Capacity In Panel Raceway Width

Max 1 Duplex receptacle per panel side

24"

Max 2 Duplex receptacles per panel side

n

30" and wider

n

Various Electrical Layouts

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

∙∙ When ending power in two

PREPARE

SURPASS

return panels, wiring pigtails must be returned to original panel run. ∙∙ To power a 3-Way panel connection, specify at least one double-block harness.

∙∙ To power a 4-Way panel

connection from one direction, specify at least two double block harness.

4-Circuit / 8-Wire Sample Electrical Layout M-

M-

M-

M-

M-

M-

MM-

MM-

M-

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

M-

56

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

Byrne Power-In Wiring Notes ∙∙ M-EPF2 - For use in all Maxon Panel Systems to connect system from a building

M-EPF2

Model M-EPF2 M-EPF3

n n

Wt.

List

.5 .5

301 301

WORKSURFACES

Byrne Electrical Pass-Through Wiring Notes Allows you to take power through a panel raceway. Duplex outlets cannot be used with M-EP Pass-Through wiring. EPS Single-Block Pass-Through wiring will allow the use of one outlet per panel side. Pass-Through wiring runs from 10" inside on panels, through the connection and 10" into the next panel in the run. Refer to Electrical Specification Guidelines on pages 54-56.

Pass-Through Harness

List 141 156 163 170 188 203 226 163 170 188 197 214

M-EP24 M-EP30 M-EP36 M-EP42 M-EP48 M-EP60 M-EP72 M-EPS24 M-EPS30 M-EPS36 M-EPS42 M-EPS48

n

1.2 1.5 1.7 2 2.3 2.8 4 1.5 1.8 2 2.3 2.6

M-EPS60

n

3.1

238

M-EPS72

n

4

266

n n n n n n n n n n

ACCESSORIES

Wt. n

STORAGE

Single-Block Pass-Through Harness

Model

PREPARE

Description

SURPASS

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

PREFIX

Description Power In-Feed through Side Receptacle Power In-Feed through End (Ceiling)

EMERGE

junction box. It also enters into a panel from the right or left (it pivots) and must mount in to an M-EH model number (Electrical Wiring Harness) or an M-EPS model number (Single Block). ∙∙ M-EPF3 - For use in all Maxon Panel Systems. M-EPF3 connects to building junction box and poles. Can be used with desk height power applications for a 12' ceiling. ∙∙ Refer to Electrical Specification Guidelines on pages 54-56.

SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

57

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

Byrne Electric Duplex Outlet Receptacle Notes ∙∙ Available with 3 integrated circuits 1, 2, or 3 (M-ED1, M-ED2, M-ED3) and 1 isolated circuit

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

4 (M-ED4) or 2 integrated circuits 1 and 2 (M-ED1, M-ED2) and 2 isolated circuits 3 and 4 (M-ED3D, M-ED4). Each duplex outlet receptacle is rated at 15 amps. Each circuit has a 20 amp maximum capacity (depending upon building wiring). Power-In Wiring (M-EPF2) plugs into Duplex Wiring Harness (M-EH or M-EPS) in place of a Duplex Outlet Receptale. Duplex Outlets may be added at any time by removing the outlet cover plate and plugging the Duplex Outlet Receptacle into the Duplex Wiring Harness. Isolated circuits are designated with an orange triangle. Refer to Electrical Specification Guidelines on pages 54-56.

Description Byrne Electric Duplex Outlet Circuit

STORAGE

Model M-ED1 M-ED2 M-ED3 M-ED3D M-ED4

Wt.

Cubes

List

1 1 1 1 1

0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1

47 47 47 47 47

n n n n n

Byrne Chicago Outlet Box Notes ∙∙ For hard wiring by an electrician to meet Chicago City Codes. ∙∙ Cannot be used back-to-back – one Duplex per side, per panel.

Description

ACCESSORIES

SIN 711-1

Chicago Outlet Box - Base Raceway Chicago Outlet Box - Desk Height

Model M-ECH1 M-EMCDHP

n n

Wt.

Cubes

List

1 .5

0.1 0.1

114 123

Byrne New York Junction Box Notes ∙∙ New York Junction Box provides special Power-In Wiring to meet New York City electrical code. Intended for use in 30"

SEATING

wide panel. Use in larger size panels would require modification by certified electrician at install.

Description

Model M-EPFX

n

Wt.

List

.5

279

INDEX

Power In-Feed NY Junction Box

58

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

EMERGE Integrated Power Pole Includes ∙∙ Power Pole.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Refer to EMERGE Connection Post examples. ∙∙ Power Poles cannot be placed on panels with Glass Tiles. ∙∙ Must specify the Panel Top Trim Kit for Integrated Power Pole separately (Refer to M-FTPTT below).

Model

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FTPP56 M-FTPP78

9 6

0.6 0.4

160 194

PREFIX

Description EMERGE Integrated Power Pole (Trim Kit seperate) (For 35"H & 65"H Panels)

WORKSURFACES

EMERGE Panel Top Trim Kit For Intergrated Power Pole

SURPASS

Includes ∙∙ Panel Top Trim Kit.

Notes PREPARE

∙∙ For use with EMERGE Integrated Power Pole. ∙∙ Specify Trim Kit according to the width of the panel. ∙∙ Trim kit replaces the top cap.

Width

Wt.

Cubes

List

24"

1.6

0.3

106

M-FTPTT30 M-FTPTT36 M-FTPTT42 M-FTPTT48 M-FTPTT60

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

1.8 2 2.2 3.4 3.9

0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6

125 141 157 176 192

ACCESSORIES

Model M-FTPTT24

STORAGE

Description EMERGE Panel Top Trim Kit Integrated Power Pole

SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

59

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE Byrne Electrical Duplex Wiring Harness Includes ∙∙ Built-in Jumper.

Notes ∙∙ When using M-EH Series Harnesses for duplex outlet capabilities in panels, please specify the corresponding length of ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

harness to match the panel width. All outlet placements are 12" from the edge of the panel. Refer to Electrical Specification Guidelines on pages 54-56. When specifying for GSA applications, add suffix (G) and reference list price GSA (G). Standard model without suffix (G) is not on GSA Contract (NOC).

WORKSURFACES

Description

SURPASS

SIN 711-1

Single Block Duplex Harness 24W Double Block Duplex Harness 30W Double Block Duplex Harness 36W Double Block Duplex Harness 42W Double Block Duplex Harness 48W Double Block Duplex Harness 60W Double Block Duplex Harness 72W

Model M-EH24 (G) M-EH30 (G) M-EH36 (G) M-EH42 (G) M-EH48 (G) M-EH60 (G) M-EH72 (G)

n n n n n n n

W

Wt.

List

List GSA (G)

24 30 36 42 48 60 72

2 2 3 3 3 4 4

203 225 249 260 269 288 311

203 225 260 270 278 300 322

D

E UD

L

C EX

Telecommunication Receptacles Notes

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

∙∙ Faceplates and Jacks available in black only.

60

Description 3-Port Faceplate 4-Port Faceplate Snap In Jack RJ11 Cat 3 Snap In Jack R45 Cat 5E Snap In Jack R45 Cat 6

Model M-FP3RJ45 M-FP4RJ45 M-SIJRJ11 M-SIJRJ45 M-SIJRJ456S

n n n n n

Wt.

List

.1 .1 .1 .1 .1

24 24 41 46 137

Desk-Height Power & Data Receptacle Includes ∙∙ 2 simplex electrical receptacles, 2 open ports for voice/data jacks, 6’ cord with plug.

Notes ∙∙ Works in conjunction with scalloped-shaped cutouts in worksurfaces. ∙∙ Allows the convenience of worksurface-height receptacles.

Description Desk Height Power and Data Receptacle

Model M-DOME

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

.8

0.2

349

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

Overhead Cabinets with Flipper Door Includes ∙∙ Overhead cabinets, core removable locks, two keys and attaching brackets.

Notes EMERGE

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Overhead Cabinets have exposed back with backsplash. Ball bearing Overhead Door slides. Door recedes over top of Overhead Cabinet. 60" W & 72"W Overhead Cabinets have 2 doors. Please specify models specific to Panel Systems or Wall Mount applications. Refer to page 63 for keyed alike option.

Model

Flipper Painted Door - Panel Mount

M-USOH1524FE M-USOH1530FE M-USOH1536FE M-USOH1542FE M-USOH1548FE

n n

n n n n

n n n n

n n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

35 38 41 46 52 62 72

3.6 4.4 5.3 6.1 6.9 8.6 15.1

532 552 586 628 685 923 1058

15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

35 38 41 46 52 62

3.6 4.4 5.3 6.1 6.9 8.6

532 552 586 628 685 923

15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48"

35 38 41 46 52

3.6 4.4 5.3 6.1 6.9

825 865 911 943 993

STORAGE

Ready-to-Assemble Overhead Cabinet Includes

ACCESSORIES

∙∙ Overhead cabinets, core removable locks, two keys, cabinet and assembly hardware.

Notes Does not come preassembled. 60" and 72" wide cabinets have two doors. Overhead Cabinets have exposed back. Refer to page 63 for keyed alike option.

Description Panel Mount Ready-to-Assemble Overhead Cabinet with Flipper Door

Model n n n n n n

H

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

21 24 27 30 33 42 49

1.6 1.6 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.5 3.0

325 339 359 385 420 566 712

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

M-USOC24R M-USOC30R M-USOC36R M-USOC42R M-USOC48R M-USOC60R M-USOC72R

n

SEATING

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

PREPARE

n n

n

D

SURPASS

Flipper Easy Assist Painted Door

M-UWMSOH1524F M-UWMSOH1530F M-UWMSOH1536F M-UWMSOH1542F M-UWMSOH1548F M-UWMSOH1560F

n

H

WORKSURFACES

Flipper Painted Door - Wall Mount

M-USOH1524F M-USOH1530F M-USOH1536F M-USOH1542F M-USOH1548F M-USOH1560F M-USOH1572F

n

PREFIX

Description

61

REFERENCE

EMERGE

SIN 711-1

Overhead Cabinets with Hinged Door Includes

Notes ∙∙ Overhead Cabinets have exposed back with backsplash. ∙∙ 24"-36" cabinets have 2 doors. 42"-60" have 4 doors. ∙∙ Refer to page 63 for keyed alike option. Description

Model M-USOH1524H M-USOH1530H M-USOH1536H M-USOH1542H M-USOH1548H

Hinged Painted Door - Panel Mount

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Overhead cabinets, core removable locks, two keys and attaching brackets.

n n n n n

H

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

16" 16" 16" 16" 16"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48"

35 38 41 46 52

3.6 4.4 5.3 6.1 6.9

1035 1075 1120 1151 1199

Overhead Cabinets with Steel Sliding Door Includes Notes ∙∙ Overhead Cabinets have exposed back with backsplash. ∙∙ Please specify models specific to Panel Systems or Wall-Mount applications.

STORAGE

PREPARE

∙∙ Overhead cabinets and attaching brackets.

Panel Mount Steel Sliding Door

H

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

n

15"

16"

24"

35

3.6

642

n

15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

16" 16" 16" 16" 16"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

38 41 46 52 62

4.4 5.3 6.1 6.9 8.6

665 697 739 790 1108

Model M-USOH1524S M-USOH1530S M-USOH1536S M-USOH1542S M-USOH1548S M-USOH1560S

n n n n

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

Description

62

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

Upmount Kits for Overheads Includes ∙∙ Consists of two upmount brackets, full back panel and required installation hardware.

EMERGE

Notes Allows mounting of an assembled overhead cabinet up to 15" above height of panel. Brackets require a clearance of 61/2" below bottom of overhead cabinet. Width must correspond with width of panel frame or two panel frames joined directly inline. Full back panels adds 1/2" to depth of overhead case. Full back panel only used when upmounting cabinet. ∙∙ Cannot be used with RTA models. ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Model M-USUM24 M-USUM30 M-USUM36 M-USUM42 M-USUM48 M-USUM60

n n n n n n

H

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

7 8 10 11 12 16

0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6

227 242 257 268 278 309

WORKSURFACES

Panel Mount Ready-to-Assemble Overhead Cabinet with Flipper Door

PREFIX

Description

SURPASS PREPARE

Overhead Cabinet Locks Includes ∙∙ Each M-LC kit includes one core and core removal tool, two keys and instructions.

STORAGE

Notes ∙∙ Order required quantity of M-LC Kits and specify key number between 101 and 225 for each

keyed-alike group.

Model M-LC M-MK

Lock Core Kit Master Key (1)

Example

n n

Wt.

Cubes

List

1 1

0.1 0.1

33 20

SEATING

Lock Core shown in application.

ACCESSORIES

Description

How To Specify: Ordering Example:

M

-

L

C

INDEX

key number

item number

·

1

0

1

E

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

63

REFERENCE

EMERGE

SIN 711-1

Task Lighting Includes

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Fluorescent light bulb, hanger bars.

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Light available in Black finish only. Mount under Overhead Storage Cabinet or Shelf. For Chicago version with Fuse Plug, order FP option. Cord cover is metal construction. Specify paint finish option. 6 ft. cord.

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Description

PREPARE

Wattage

Model

Task Light 24W or greater Task Light 30W or greater Task Light 42W or greater Task Light 54W or greater

15 20 30 40

M-USL24 M-USL30 M-USL42 M-USL54

Task Light 24W or greater-Fuse Plug Task Light 30W or greater-Fuse Plug Task Light 42W or greater-Fuse Plug

15 20 30

M-USL24FP M-USL30FP M-USL42FP

n

Task Light 54W or greater-Fuse Plug

40

M-USL54FP M-CCM10 M-CCM15 M-CCM20

Cord Cover Cord Cover Cord Cover

H

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

2" 2" 2" 2"

7" 7" 7" 7"

18" 24.25" 36.25" 48.25"

6 7 9 11

0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4

226 254 285 332

7" 7" 7"

18.25" 24.25" 36.25"

6 7 9

0.4 0.4 0.4

314 344

n

2" 2" 2"

n

2"

7"

48.25"

11

0.4

407

n

10" 15" 20"

2" 2" 2"

2" 2" 2"

2 2 2

0.2 0.2 0.2

32 34 45

n n n n

n

n n

375

Universal Overhead Task Lighting

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

Includes ∙∙ Fluorescent light bulb, 9 foot cord, 4 cord clips, mounting bars.

ED

UD EXCL

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Light available in black finish only. Mount under Overhead Storage Cabinet or Shelf. For Chicago version with Fuse Plug, order FP option. Excluded from GSA Description Universal Overhead Task Light 24W Universal Overhead Task Light 30W Universal Overhead Task Light 42W Universal Overhead Task Light 60W Universal Overhead Task Light 24W - Fuse Plug Universal Overhead Task Light 30W - Fuse Plug Universal Overhead Task Light 42W - Fuse Plug Universal Overhead Task Light 60W - Fuse Plug

Model M-USLO24 M-USLO30 M-USLO42 M-USLO60 M-USLO24FP M-USLO30FP M-USLO42FP M-USLO60FP

n n n n n n n n

H

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

1.1" 1.1" 1.1" 1.1"

3.7" 3.7" 3.7" 3.7"

24" 30" 42" 60"

5 7 10 12

0.4 0.6 0.9 1.1

187 207 233 284

1.1" 1.1" 1.1" 1.1"

3.7" 3.7" 3.7" 3.7"

24" 30" 42" 60"

5 7 10 12

0.4 0.6 0.9 1.1

197 223 247 305

For other lighting options see the Accessories section.

64

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

Ready-to-Assemble (RTA) Overhead Shelf Includes ∙∙ Straight Shelf with Steel End Panels.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Does not come preassembled. ∙∙ Overhead Shelves have exposed back.

Panel Mount RTA Overhead Shelf

Model n n n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

5 5/8" 5 5/8" 5 5/8" 5 5/8" 5 5/8" 5 5/8" 5 5/8"

11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

10 11 12 13 14 16 18

1.9 1.9 1.9 2.1 2.4 3 3.5

162 170 182 201 222 249 273

Overhead Shelves

SURPASS

Includes

WORKSURFACES

M-USSC24R M-USSC30R M-USSC36R M-USSC42R M-USSC48R M-USSC60R M-USSC72R

H

PREFIX

Description

∙∙ Straight Shelf with Steel End Panels.

Notes ∙∙ Overhead Shelves have exposed back with backsplash.

PREPARE

Description Universal Open Straight Shelf

Model n n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

14" 14" 14" 14" 14" 14" 14"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

11 13 14 17 19 23 23

1.0 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.6 2 3.6

268 278 283 288 293 309 381

Shelf Organizer Includes

SEATING

∙∙ Shelf Organizer

ACCESSORIES

n

H 8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 8"

STORAGE

M-UOSS24 M-UOSS30 M-UOSS36 M-UOSS42 M-UOSS48 M-UOSS60 M-UOSS72

Notes ∙∙ Vertically divides and aligns books, magazines and folders. ∙∙ Fits all Universal Overhead Cabinets and Shelves. ∙∙ Not compatible with Overhead Cabinets with Sliding Doors.

Shelf Organizer

Model M-PSO14

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

6

0.4

67

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

Description

65

REFERENCE

EMERGE

SIN 711-1

Universal Accessory Panel Rail and Accessories Notes components. ∙∙ The rails are designed for use on panels only. ∙∙ Accessories can be used only on the Universal Accessory Rail. ∙∙ Diagonal trays are non-handed.

H

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

n

5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5"

.5" .5" .5" .5" .5" .5"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

5 6 7 8 9 11

0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5

192 206 216 229 238 277

M-PS21

n

1.75"

7"

21"

3

0.5

135

Letter Tray

M-LT

n

1.7"

9"

13"

0.5

0.5

132

Binder Bin

M-SB

n

8.5"

5.2"

3

0.8

0.8

132

Diagonal Tray - (Non-handed) (3)

M-DT

n

8.5"

9.5"

4.5"

2

0.3

182

Description Universal Accessory Rail

Personal Shelf (21")

Model M-ACCRAIL24 M-ACCRAIL30 M-ACCRAIL36 M-ACCRAIL42 M-ACCRAIL48 M-ACCRAIL60

n n n n n

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ The Universal Panel Accessory rail is 5" high and provides a continuous full-width slot for mounting personal accessory

66

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE

Description

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FP

n

8.9"

12"

2

0.3

135

Paper Clip

M-CLIP2

n

1.9"

5"

1

0.2

135

M-SMTRAY

n

1.8"

6.8"

1

0.1

94

M-TB

n

5.25

5"

1

0.2

105

EMERGE

File Pocket

REFERENCE

Universal Accessory Panel Rail and Accessories Continued...

PREFIX

Small Paper Clip Tray

WORKSURFACES

Tool Box

SURPASS PREPARE

Panel Accessories Notes ∙∙ M-RCKO is for replacement and reconfigure only.

Power/Data Knockout Cover

Model M-RCKO

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

.01

0.3

10

Cantilever Double Coat Hook

M-DGH

n

0.3

0.3

32

ACCESSORIES

EXCLUDED

STORAGE

Description

SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

67

REFERENCE

EMERGE

SIN 711-1

Universal Panel Mounted Whiteboard

EMERGE

Includes ∙∙ Panel mounted whiteboard and Marker tray.

Notes

PREFIX

∙∙ Panel Mount can be moved from space to space as needed. ∙∙ This surface is a dry erase application.

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

Panel Mounted Whiteboard 13H x 24W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 13H x 30W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 13H x 36W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 13H x 42W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 13H x 48W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 13H x 60W

M-PMWB1324 M-PMWB1330 M-PMWB1336 M-PMWB1342 M-PMWB1348 M-PMWB1360

n n n n n n

13" 13" 13" 13" 13" 13"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

6 7 9 10 12 15

1 1.3 1.5 1.7 2 2.4

359 392 411 421 430 443

Panel Mounted Whiteboard 26H x 24W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 26H x 30W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 26H x 36W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 26H x 42W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 26H x 48W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 26H x 60W

M-PMWB2624 M-PMWB2630 M-PMWB2636 M-PMWB2642 M-PMWB2648 M-PMWB2660

n n n n n n

26" 26" 26" 26" 26" 26"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

9 11 13 15 18 23

1.9 2.3 2.8 3.2 3.6 4.5

430 446 453 463 472 485

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Description

68

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

EMERGE REFERENCE

Universal Fabric Tackboard - Wall & Panel Mounted Includes

EMERGE

∙∙ Fabric Tackboard

Notes ∙∙ Panel Mount can be moved from space to space as needed.

PREFIX

Description

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

Grade A Grade B List List

6 7 9 10 12 15

0.6 0.8 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.6

313 326 353 378 412 437

9 9 9 11 11 11

Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx24W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx30W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx36W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx42W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx48W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx60W

M-PMTB2624 M-PMTB2630 M-PMTB2636 M-PMTB2642 M-PMTB2648 M-PMTB2660

n n n n n n

26" 26" 26" 26" 26" 26"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

9 11 13 15 18 23

1.3 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.1 2.3

326 353 373 399 431 464

12 12 12 13 13 13

Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx24W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx30W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx36W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx42W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx48W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx60W

M-WMTB1324 M-WMTB1330 M-WMTB1336 M-WMTB1342 M-WMTB1348 M-WMTB1360

n n n n n n

13" 13" 13" 13" 13" 13"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

6 7 9 10 12 15

0.6 0.8 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.6

313 326 353 378 412 437

9 9 9 11 11 11

Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx24W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx30W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx36W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx42W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx48W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx60W

M-WMTB2624 M-WMTB2630 M-WMTB2636 M-WMTB2642 M-WMTB2648 M-WMTB2660

n n n n n n

26" 26" 26" 26" 26" 26"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

9 11 13 15 18 23

1.3 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.1 2.3

326 353 373 399 431 464

12 12 12 13 13 13

ACCESSORIES

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

STORAGE

13" 13" 13" 13" 13" 13"

PREPARE

n n n n n n

SURPASS

M-PMTB1324 M-PMTB1330 M-PMTB1336 M-PMTB1342 M-PMTB1348 M-PMTB1360

WORKSURFACES

Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx24W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx30W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx36W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx42W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx48W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx60W

SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

69

SIN 711-1

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

EMERGE

70

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE EMERGE PREFIX

Value-engineered to be versatile, efficient and cost-effective, your office will function the way you want and look good doing it. Built to last with excellent fit and finish, PREFIX is affordable without compromising quality.

Worksurfaces are available with high pressure laminate to meet your budget and aesthetic needs. PREFIX is manufactured in the USA and is covered by Maxon's Limited Lifetime Warranty.

Features

Benefits

Glass allows more natural light to enter workspace. A different fabric can be specified for the fabric stacker, adding color to the workspace.

120 Degree Connector

Offers a contemporary look for your space.

Maxon's line of universal and EMERGE storage works with PREFIX.

Choose universal storage options such as overhead cabinets, pedestals, lateral files and bookshelves.

INDEX

Panels available in monolithic and glass header. 15" Glass or fabric stackers can be added.

SEATING

Variable heights and widths can be configured to fit almost any workspace. Panels are tackable.

ACCESSORIES

Panels are 21/8" thick and available in 4 heights and 8 widths

STORAGE

QuickShip is available on orders that qualify. Faster shipping is also available on orders that qualify through PREFIX Prime. See program pricer for eligibility and terms and conditions.

TABLES

Connector posts are available in straight, extended straight, 2-Way, 3-Way, and 4-Way options, provide optimal versatility and structural rigidity. Connect two stations or 10 depending upon your needs. Quick delivery and easy installation means a you're up and working fast.

SURPASS

PREFIX panels are 2 1/8" thick, and can be configured in a variety of heights and fabric finishes. Fabric panels combined with glass panels and glass and fabric stackers equates to a variety of looks and heights to fit any area of your office. Glass panels and stackers are available in clear or frosted glass and let natural light in while maintaining privacy. Maxon's broad range of storage solutions provides a place for everything.

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX Panel System ®

Prices effective January 4, 2016. Information in this pricebook is accurate as of January 4, 2016. The pricebook is updated monthly. Go to www. MaxonEdge.com to find the most current pricing information in the electronic pricebook. Information is updated monthly in CAD and GIZA. Maxon recommends updating 20-20 Technologies software every month. *Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

71

PREFIX

SIN 711-1

Top trim is relocated from base panel frame.

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

Working with PREFIX Panels

Panels are 21⁄8" nominal thick, (use 21⁄4" to calculate inter­sections in length of panel runs).

Lay-in base pathway accepts voice, data and fiber optic cable, as well as electrical system.

TABLES

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Structural panel frames are available in 35", 421⁄2", 50", and 65" nominal heights.

Depth: 21⁄8" (use 21⁄4" to calcu­late intersections in length of panel run) Widths: 20", 24", 30", 36", 42", 48", 60", 72" Heights: 341⁄4", 413⁄4", 491⁄4", 641⁄4" (with levelers fully retracted) Leveling Glides: 21⁄8" range Stacking Panels: 15"H fabric and glass, 30"H glass Frameless Glass Screens: 71⁄2"H, 15"H

INDEX

Panel frames are shipped with base pathway covers and top trim installed.

Base pathway cover has outlet openings that accept duplex receptacles or commercially avai­lable modular data faceplates.

Tackable and Non-Tackable Panels

Frame Dimensions (Actual)

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

Leveling glides provide 21⁄8" of adjustment.

72

Stacking panels are available in 15"H tackable or glazed and 30"H glazed. Glass panel mounted screens are also available for topping off panels in 71⁄2" or 15"H, select either clear or frosted glass.

Inline connections between panels in a continuous run are accomplished with an inline connector kit.

∙∙ Specifications: 4-sided, welded tubular steel panel frame. ∙∙ Panel frames include and are shipped with base pathway covers and top trim installed. ∙∙ Hardware included with connector kits. ∙∙ Available in 4 heights and 8 widths — add 3⁄8" for each panel vertical end trim. ∙∙ Panel frames can be leveled up to 21⁄8". Actual panel height varies depending on position of leveling glides. ∙∙ Direct connections between same height frames in a continuous run are accomplished with provided hardware. There is no incremen­tal increase in dimension along the run. ∙∙ For adequate stability, one of two methods of stabiliza­tion shown on page 74 must be adhered to. ∙∙ Due to depth of panel, back‑to‑back data modules should not be used in the base. Optional 3-hole kickplates are available. ∙∙ Add 21⁄4" to panel run for each “L”, “T”, “X”, or extended straight connector (“S”). ∙∙ Acoustical panels meet BIFMA recommendations. ∙∙ Fabric selection for 72"W panels is limited. Available 72"W panel fabrics are flagged with a “W” on the inside back cover of this price list.

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX

Specification Information PREFIX fabric panels are available in tackable and non-tackable options. Tackable fabric panels provide tackability and sound absorption. Finish options include fabric and glass. PREFIX panels are available in Grade A and Grade B fabrics. Fabric options are located in the front of the pricebook. Available in raceway at the base. Raceway panels are UL labeled and include a 4.25" tall raceway channel. 20"W raceway panels have no knockouts, 24"W have one knockout and all others have two for either electrical duplex outlets or data communication ports. ∙∙ End-covers (M-PFXC-xxE) must be specified for the end of every panel run.

EMERGE

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

REFERENCE

PREFIX Panels

Glass Stackers

∙∙ Glass panels and stackers use tempered glass and are available in both Clear and Frosted glass options.

∙∙ PREFIX panels are 21/8" in depth. ∙∙ There is no panel creep within the panels, but outside workstation dimensions grow by 2.25" for every connecting post. ∙∙ Wall Connectors have no creep to a panel run.

SEATING

Door Panel Frame

ACCESSORIES

∙∙ To be included in overall height of panel with a maximum combined height of 80".

STORAGE

Glass Panel Mounted Screens

∙∙ Frameless insert integrated into the base panel frame top trim. ∙∙ Replaces top trim on structural or stacking tackable frame. ∙∙ It is possible to span multiple frames when the combined frame width is equal to the panel mounted screen width. ∙∙ Cannot do variable height, must go on highest panel(s). ∙∙ Panel mounted screens are non‑structural. Do not hang or stack on top of panel mounted screens. ∙∙ Available in 3⁄8" thick clear or frosted glass.

TABLES

Available 50"H and 65"H with 15"H clear or frosted tempered safety glass inserts (specified). Glass frame is painted to match trim. Cannot stack on glazed panels. Fabric selection for 72"W panels is limited.

SURPASS

Tackable Glazed Panels

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

WORKSURFACES

Stacking Tackable and Glazed Panels

∙∙ When adding stacking panels, remove the top trim from the structural panel, and install top trim on top of the stacking panel. ∙∙ Stacking connection provides a solid connection, allowing the stacking frame to accept hang-on compo­nents, per PREFIX configuration guidelines at left. ∙∙ Includes attachment hardware. Utilizes top cap from base panel. ∙∙ Only one stacking glazed panel can be added to top position of any PREFIX panel of same width from 20"W to 72"W up to a maximum combined height of 80". ∙∙ Specify connectors separately. ∙∙ End trim is specified in full end height to include height of base panel + stacking panel. ∙∙ Stacking glazed panels feature clear or frosted tempered safety glass inserts (specified). Glass frame is painted to match trim. ∙∙ Stacking frames can be added to the top of 35"H, 50"H, and 65"H base panels up to 80"H; added to 421⁄2"H panels up to 721⁄2"H. ∙∙ Slot modularity will be lost on stacker used with 421⁄2"H panels. If panel mounting slots are not being used, this is not an issue. ∙∙ Do not combine differing frame widths in a single stack. ∙∙ Stacking frames cannot be used as base frames. ∙∙ Fabric selection for 72"W panels is limited.

PREFIX

Panel Dimensions & Growth Allowances

∙∙ The 80"H door panel frame includes 42"W frame, 36"W laminate door, top trim, hinges, and attaching hardware. ∙∙ See illustration at right.

INDEX

∙∙ Lockset with knob or lever ordered separately.

PREFIX Sliding Doors and Mounting Kits ∙∙ PREFIX sliding doors are available in 50"H, 65"H, and 80"H. ∙∙ See illustration and specification information on page "Working with Sliding Doors" on page 79.

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

73

Building Vertically with PREFIX Panels

SIN 711-1

Stacking Frame Connection Glazed panels only in top position

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREFIX

Building Horizontally with PREFIX Panels Method 1—Opposing Returns

Method 2—Single-Sided Returns .

ls ne Pa rn n x. tu t Ru ma e o R ren 0" Tw Pan./12 i "m 48

"

48

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

Sliding doors are available in 50"H, 65"H, and 80"H.

rn

tu

e oR

ls

ne

Pa

Tw

Y n. els ru an of P d rn en u et nd t o R g a ar s Tw nin e chd 2 turn in e o e eg S eth d R b M ide at S gle Sin

Method 2 – Single-sided Returns Single-Sided Panel Run 48"-66" 72"-84" 90" 96"-102" 108" 114"-120"

Minimum Return Panels Total (X+Y) 60" 60" 66" 72" 78" 84"

Minimum Return Panels Total (X+Y) with Stack-ons 72" 84" 84" 84" 84" 96"

Important planning guidelines: For adequate stability, one of two methods of stabiliza­tion must be adhered to: Method 1 — Opposing returns • A parent run must be a minimum of 48" and a maximum of 120" between return panels. • The parent run must have a minimum of two 24"W return panels running in opposing directions on each end of run. • Return panels must not be any more than 30" shorter in height than parent run.

Method 2 — Single‑sided returns • A parent run must be a minimum of 48" and a maximum of 120" between return panels. • The parent run must have a minimum of two return panels total­ing at least 70% of its length, extending in one direction. Stack-ons require additional length. See chart. • Return panels must not be any more than 30" shorter in height than parent run. • Any run under 84" must have a minimum combined length of 60" of return panels.

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

TABLES

X

un ax t R" m ren 20 Pan./1 mi

74

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX Connectors and Trim Inline Connector Kit

Extended Straight “S” Connector Kit “T” 3-Way

Example 3 Connectors required: 1–65"H “L”

“X” 4-Way

65"H

∙∙ Multiple-height connections also utilize standard “L”, “T”, “X”, and “S” connectors, in the height of the tallest panel. (See examples 1-4 at left.)

Panel End Trim

Example 1 65"H Panel

50"H Panel Frame

Example 4 65"H P3CONVH15

Variable Height Connector Kits — Post Trim ∙∙ Includes connectors, vertical cover, and attaching hardware. ∙∙ Order one per each panel height change in an “L”, “T”, “X”, or “S”.

In variable height “T” connections as shown above, you would use the connectors as indicated.

Example 2

50"H

Example above represents PREFIX variable height connection for 65"H to 50"H.

50"H

INDEX

65"H

Wall Mount Kits ∙∙ Wall mount kits provide a means to affix a panel run to a permanent building wall. ∙∙ Includes top cap. (Color must be specified.) ∙∙ Connector adds 1" to length of panel run. ∙∙ Anchor devices are not supplied with the wall mount kit. Refer to PREFIX Installation Instructions for appropriate hardware.

SEATING

P3CONL65

Connectors required: 1–65"H “X” 1–15"H “VH” 1–221⁄2"H “VH” 1–30"H “VH”

ACCESSORIES

Inline Variable Height End Trim Finish Kits ∙∙ End vertical cover (includes top cap). ∙∙ High‑low “H” covers the exposed end of a panel when joining panels in‑line of differing heights. PREFIX profile adds 3⁄8" to length of panel run. ∙∙ Order one per each panel height change in an in‑line connection. ∙∙ At the end of a panel run use panel end trim.

STORAGE

Base connectors (includes base pathway) must be specified at base regardless of full height or segmented connection.

∙∙ End vertical trim cover (includes top cap — adds 3⁄8" to run). ∙∙ Order to finish the end of every panel run (except when attaching panels to permanent walls).

TABLES

Connectors required: 1–50"H “T” 1–15"H “VH”

421⁄2"H

SURPASS

Multiple-Height Connections 1 – 15"H Stacking Panels

WORKSURFACES

“L” 90-Degree

• “L”, “T”, and “X” connector kits are used when connecting panels at intersecting runs. For “L”, “T”, and “X” connector kits, add 21⁄4" to the total length of the panel run for each intersec­tion, whether located in the middle or at the end of the run. • Includes top cap, connectors, vertical cover(s), and attaching hardware. • Extended straight connector kit “S” can be used to keep continuous runs dimensionally consistent with opposing panel runs which incorporate “T” or “X” intersections. • Add 21⁄4" to the length of the run for every extended straight connector used.

PREFIX

“L”, “T”, “X”, and “S” Connector Kits

EMERGE

∙∙ Inline connections between panels in a continuous run are accomplished with an inline connector kit. There is no incremen­tal increase in dimension along the run. ∙∙ Inline connector kits include all parts required for connecting two panels of same height together. ∙∙ Kit includes inline connector strap, hardware, and glide tower to glide tower screw. ∙∙ Order panel end trim kits to finish the end of every panel run (except when attaching panels to permanent walls).

REFERENCE

Inline Connector Kit

35"H

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

75

SIN 711-1

Monolithic Panel Price Grade Options: ∙∙ PREFIX panels are available in fabric finish options. ∙∙ Specify same finish for both sides.

Fabric Panel: ∙∙ Base price includes Grade A fabric options. ∙∙ List price upcharge is applied for Grade B options. Fabric Upcharge Base

n

Grade A

Grade B

Glass Segment: ∙∙ Base price includes Clear Glass option. ∙∙ When desired, specify alternate Frosted Glass finish option; example: .FT. ∙∙ List price upcharge is applied for Frosted (FT) options

15"H Glass Header Panel: ∙∙ Fabric | Glass

FG

15"H GLASS HEADER

BOTTOM

Paint Finish:

50" High 65" High

∙∙ Base Price includes Core finish options.

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

TABLES

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREFIX

76

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

76

SIN 711-1

PREFIX

15” Segmented Raceway Glass Upper *Available in fabric base

35” High 42” High 50” High 65” High

50” High 65” High

Glass and Fabric Stackers

15" Glass Stacker

15" Fabric Stacker

Frameless Glass

Available in straight, extended straight, 2-Way 90º “L”, 3-Way “T”, 4-Way "X" and 120 degree

WORKSURFACES

Hinge Door

Sliding Door

SURPASS

Worksurfaces Rectangular

PREFIX

Connector Posts

Doors

30" Glass Stacker

EMERGE

Monolithic Raceway *Available in fabric options

REFERENCE

PREFIX Panels

Arc Cutout

Transitional

Half-Round Extension

TABLES

90º Corner Countertop

Universal 120 Degree Corner

Radius End Peninsula

Straight Front Transition Corner

“b or d” Shaped Peninsula (“b” Shown)

SEATING

120 Degree Worksurface

Grand Peninsula

Radius Front Transition Corner

Radius Front L-Return

ACCESSORIES

Curved Peninsula

Radius Front Corner

Straight Front L-Return

STORAGE

Straight Front Corner

Straight Countertop

120 Degree Countertop Prefix 120 Degree Corner Countertop TM

Worksurface Edge Options INDEX

T-Mold

Edgeband (solid)

Edgeband (woodgrain)

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

77

PREFIX

SIN 711-1

REFERENCE

Pedestal Files - Available in File/File or Box/Box/File Options

A-Pull

Systems Pedestal File

Mobile Pedestal with Seat Cushion

Personal Storage - Available in R-Pull and A-Pull Options

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

R-Pull

Lateral Files

Personal Storage Center

Overfile Cabinet

Lateral File Laminate Top

Personal Storage Tower

Bookcases

INCLUDE low storage

End Tower with Bookcase

aznederC nepO EDULCNI

Storage Cabinet

TABLES

Accessories

Letter Tray

Diagonal Tray

Personal Shelf

Binder Bin

File Pocket Paper Clip Tray Tool Box

Paper Clip

Monitor Arms

Dual Monitor Arms

Task Lights

Desk Lamps Keyboard Trays

CPU Holder

Electrical Receptacle

Foot Rest

Overhead Cabinets and Shelves

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

Accessory Rail

Painted Door

Hinged Door

Sliding Steel Door

Ready-to-Assemble Cabinet

INDEX

*Available with Easy-Assist Option

Straight Shelf

78

Ready-to-Assemble Shelf

Upmount Kit

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX

Sliding doors for PREFIX are a great addition to any new or existing installations. The sliding door can be specified with specific mounting kits for each door ordered. With a Frosted Translucent insert and your choice of Core or Select paint, the sliding door will create a unique look for any office environment.

TABLES STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SURPASS

General Guidelines for Layout Planning of Sliding Door • Stability guidelines must be followed when specifying a sliding door. The sliding door system was designed to close an opening in a run of lateral panels. Doors mounted to long runs of panels without floor support, ties to worksurfaces, or return panels may seem less stable. • If the door is used to close an opening (A) where the panel opposite the door is at 90°, there will be a gap equal to the panel thickness between the door and the panel end when closed. • When planning the layout, care must be taken if the plan includes a door mounted on a panel that is less than 42"W. If the panel is at a corner (B), the door will protrude into the aisle or next workstation when in the open position. • If back-to-back doors are mounted on panels (C) that are less than 42"W they will interfere with each if both are open at the same time. • The door is attached at the base of the panel at any end position with a wrap around bracket. Bracket kits are ordered in conjunction with appropriate end trim profiles. The slots at the base of the panel must be clear (D) and cannot be utilized by worksurface supports or panel hung components. • If the door is mounted to a panel run that is positioned adjacent to a wall (E) or an inside 90° angle and there is not a 42" clearance between the track and the wall/inside 90° the assembly of the first stop will be difficult and plans will need to be modified for the assembly. • If a door is closing an opening of a workstation that includes a "T" connector in the opposite wall, an extended straight connector may need to be used to maintain the 36" required opening. • The slide door is designed to be attached to an end of run panel only. The slide door should not be specified to a panel that is connected on both ends, regardless if one of those ends is connecting to a connector kit. Failure abide by this rule will result in a failure to install the door.

WORKSURFACES

• The system requires the ordering of both a door and a mounting bracket kit. • All doors are 42" wide to accommodate a 36"W opening and are non-handed . Door leveling is dependant on floor being level. • A mounting bracket kit must be ordered for each door corresponding to the mounting panels width (30", 36", 42", or 48"W). • Mounting bracket kits are system specific and for PREFIX.

PREFIX

General Guidelines for Use of Sliding Door

EMERGE

The sliding doors are available in 50", 65", and 80"H models and can mount to 30", 36", 42", and 48"W panels. They accommodate a 36"W opening and are 42"W, nominally. The door ships from the factory non-handed and can be installed in either right or left handed applications. The handle pulls located on each side of the door are non-locking and are color matched to the trim to create a uniform style. And with the threshold free design, the sliding door offers better aesthetics and safety by eliminating the potential for tripping.

REFERENCE

Working with Sliding Doors

79

SIN 711-1

Typical PREFIX Configurations Typical configurations are commonly ordered layouts shown for planning and budgeting purposes. List pricing for typical configurations is based on Core Laminate and Paint finishes, Grade A Fabric and edgeband finish. Models MUST be ordered individually.

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREFIX

Includes:

TABLES

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Core (C) Laminate Core Paint Clear Glass Grade A Fabric Edgeband

10x11 PREFIX Private Office

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

MODEL #

80

DESCRIPTION

QTY LIST $

MODEL #

DESCRIPTION

QTY LIST $

M-ED1

Duplex Outlet Circuit #1

1

$47

M-PFXS-1536G

Prefix Glass Stacker 15H x 36W

3

$1,779

M-ED4

Duplex Outlet Circuit #4 - Isolated/Dedicated

1

$47

M-PFXS-1542F

Prefix Fabric Stacker 15H x 42W

4

$2,044

M-EH42

Standard Double Block Duplex Harness 42W

2

$520

M-PFXS-1542G

Prefix Glass Stacker 15H x 42W

1

$658

M-EP24

Pass-Through Harness 24W

1

$141

M-PFXSD8042

Prefix Sliding Door 80Hx36W

1

$1,645

M-EPF2

Power In-Feed through Side Receptacle

1

$301

M-PFXSDKIT36

Prefix Sliding Door Kit for 36W

1

$255

M-PFXC-80E

Prefix Panel End Covers 80H

2

$204

M-UOSS42

Univ Open Straight Shelf 42W

1

$288

M-PFXC-80L

Prefix L Connector 80H

3

$609

M-USOH1542H

Univ OH Cab 15Hx42W Hinged Pnt Door

1

$1,151

M-PFXC-S

Prefix Straight Connector Kit

9

$81

M-LF230-A

Ridgeline Lateral- 2-Dwr 30W A-Pull

1

$1,403

M-PFXM-6524FP

Prefix Tackable Panel 65H x 24W No Top Cap

2

$1,150

M-PEDSPR6-LH

Pedestal to-Panel Spacer, 6", LH

1

$81

M-PFXTC24

24W Top Cap

2

$80

M-MDSL

Maxon Support Leg

1

$195

M-PFXM-6530FP

Prefix Tackable Panel 65H x 30W No Top Cap

2

$1,216

M-C1R

Univ Cantilevered Worksurf Bracket RH

1

$59

M-PFXTC30

30W Top Cap

2

$100

M-CWB2

S1K Cantilever W/S Bracket Kit (2 pack)

1

$31

M-PFXM-6536FP

Prefix Tackable Panel 65H x 36W No Top Cap

4

$2,592

M-UPR3072E

Unv Radius End Peninsula Wksfc 30Dx72W EdgBnd

1

$756

M-PFXTC36

36W Top Cap

4

$260

M-UWR2442E

Univ Wksfc-Rectglr 24Dx42W Edgeband

1

$351

M-PFXM-6542FP

Prefix Tackable Panel 65H x 42W No Top Cap

5

$3,380

M-UWR2484E

Univ Wksfc-Rectglr 24Dx84W Edgeband

1

$570

M-PFXTC42

42W Top Cap

5

$375

M-UWSKP

Peninsula Worksurface Support Kit

1

$252

M-PFXS-1524F

Prefix Fabric Stacker 15H x 24W

2

$816

M-PFXS-1530G

Prefix Glass Stacker 15H x 30W

2

$1,150

M-PFXS-1536F

Prefix Fabric Stacker 15H x 36W

1

$475

TOTAL EXTENDED LIST: $25,062

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

Typical PREFIX Configurations

EMERGE

Typical configurations are commonly ordered layouts shown for planning and budgeting purposes. List pricing for typical configurations is based on Core Laminate and Paint finishes, Grade A Fabric and edgeband finish. Models MUST be ordered individually.

PREFIX

Includes: WORKSURFACES

Core (C) Laminate Core Paint Grade A Fabric Edgeband

SURPASS

MODEL #

DESCRIPTION

QTY LIST $

MODEL #

DESCRIPTION

QTY LIST $

Duplex Outlet Circuit #1

1

$47

M-PFXM-4242FP

M-ED4

Duplex Outlet Circuit #4 - Isolated/Dedicated

1

$47

M-PFXTC42

42W Top Cap

1

$75

Prefix Tackable Panel 65H x 24W No Top Cap

2

$1,150

1

$548

Standard Double Block Duplex Harness 36W

2

$498

M-PFXM-6524FP

M-EP24

Pass-Through Harness 24W

1

$141

M-PFXTC24

24W Top Cap

2

$80

M-PFXM-6536FP

Prefix Tackable Panel 65H x 36W No Top Cap

2

$1,296

M-EP30

Pass-Through Harness 30W

1

$156

M-EP42

Pass-Through Harness 42W

1

$170

M-PFXTC36

36W Top Cap

2

$130

M-EPF2

Power In-Feed through Side Receptacle

1

$301

M-USOH1572F

Univ OH Cab 15Hx72W Flipper Pnt Door

1

$1,058

M-PFXC-22HLS

Prefix In-Line Variable Height Finishing Kit 22.5H 1

$94

M-ESP20B-A

Ridgeline Pedestal 20D BBF Stationry A-Pull

1

$894

M-PFXC-42E

Prefix Panel End Covers 42.5H

$79

M-ESP20F-A

Ridgeline Pedestal 20D FF Stationry A-Pull

1

$894

1

Prefix L Connector 42.5H

2

$300

M-MDSL

Maxon Support Leg

1

$195

Prefix Panel End Covers 65H

1

$93

M-C1L

Univ Cantilevered Worksurf Bracket LH

1

$59

M-PFXC-65L

Prefix L Connector 65H

2

$364

M-CWB2

S1K Cantilever W/S Bracket Kit (2 pack)

4

$124

M-PFXC-S

Prefix Straight Connector Kit

3

$27

M-P51500-42

42.5" Base Panel Countertop Support

3

$147

M-PFXM-4230FP

Prefix Tackable Panel 42.5H x 30W No Top Cap 2

$1,044

M-PCS1572

Straight 72Wx15D Cntp Flat Eg

1

$416

M-PFXTC30

30W Top Cap

$100

M-UWR2442E

Univ Wksfc-Rectglr 24Dx42W Edgeband

1

$351

2

Prefix Tackable Panel 42.5H x 36W No Top Cap 2

$1,064

M-UWR2472E

Univ Wksfc-Rectglr 24Dx72W Edgeband

1

$494

36W Top Cap

$130

M-UWR3072E

Univ Wksfc-Rectglr 30Dx72W Edgeband

1

$533

2

INDEX

M-PFXM-4236FP M-PFXTC36

SEATING

M-PFXC-42L M-PFXC-65E

ACCESSORIES

M-EH36

STORAGE

M-ED1

Prefix Tackable Panel 42.5H x 42W No Top Cap

TABLES

6x8 PREFIX Reception Station

TOTAL EXTENDED LIST: $13,099

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

81

SIN 711-1

Typical PREFIX Configurations Typical configurations are commonly ordered layouts shown for planning and budgeting purposes. List pricing for typical configurations is based on Core Laminate and Paint finishes, Grade A Fabric and edgeband finish. Models MUST be ordered individually.

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREFIX

TABLES

Includes:

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

Core (C) Laminate Core Paint Clear Glass Grade A Fabric Edgeband

82

PREFIX Benching MODEL #

DESCRIPTION

QTY LIST $

MODEL #

DESCRIPTION

QTY LIST $

M-ED1

Duplex Outlet Circuit #1

6

$282

M-PFXM-4224FP

Prefix Tackable Panel 42.5H x 24W No TC

8

$4,128

M-ED4

Duplex Outlet Circuit #4 - Isolated/Dedicated

6

$282

M-PFXTC24

24W Top Cap

8

$320

M-EH24

Standard Single Block Duplex Harness 24W

1

$203

M-PFXM-4260FP

Prefix Tackable Panel 42.5H x 60W No TC

3

$2,037

M-EH60

Standard Double Block Duplex Harness 60W

3

$864

M-PFXTC60

60W Top Cap

3

$285

M-EPF2

Power In-Feed through Side Receptacle

1

$301

M-ESM24BF-A

Short Mobile Pedestal - 23"D BF A-pull

6

$4,218

M-PFXC-42E

Prefix Panel End Covers 42.5H

8

$632

M-ESM24SEAT

Pedestal Seat Cushion 23"D x 15"W

6

$1,848

M-PFXC-42T

Prefix T Connector 42.5H

2

$300

M-CWB2

S1K Cantilever W/S Bracket Kit (2 pack)

12

$372

M-PFXC-42X

Prefix X Connector 42.5H

2

$300

M-UWR2460E

Univ Wksfc-Rectglr 24Dx60W Edgeband

6

$2,508

M-PFXFGS-0760

Prefix Frameless Glass Screen 7.5H x 60W

3

$1,896

TOTAL EXTENDED LIST: $20,776

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

Typical PREFIX Configurations

EMERGE

Typical configurations are commonly ordered layouts shown for planning and budgeting purposes. List pricing for typical configurations is based on Core Laminate and Paint finishes, Grade A Fabric and edgeband finish. Models MUST be ordered individually.

PREFIX WORKSURFACES SURPASS

Includes: Core (C) Laminate Core Paint Grade A Fabric Edgeband

TABLES STORAGE

6x6 PREFIX Single Station DESCRIPTION

QTY LIST $

MODEL #

DESCRIPTION

QTY LIST $

M-ED1

Duplex Outlet Circuit #1

1

$47

M-PFXTC36

36W Top Cap

4

$260

M-ED4

Duplex Outlet Circuit #4 - Isolated/Dedicated

1

$47

M-USOH1536F

Univ OH Cab 15Hx36W Flipper Pnt Door

1

$586

Power In-Feed through Side Receptacle

1

$301

M-USUM36

Univ OH Upmont 36W

1

$257

Single Block Pass-Through Harness 36W

2

$376

M-SYP20B-A

Sys & Desk Univ Pedestal 20Dx15Wx28H BBF A-Pull

1

$591

M-PFXC-50E

Prefix Panel End Covers 50H

2

$166

M-C1R

Univ Cantilevered Worksurf Bracket RH

1

$59

M-PFXC-50L

Prefix L Connector 50H

3

$480

M-CWB2

S1K Cantilever W/S Bracket Kit (2 pack)

2

$62

M-PFXC-S

Prefix Straight Connector Kit

2

$18

M-UCREL243672E

Unv L-Rtrn LH Wksfc 2436Dx72W RadFrt EdgBd

1

$818

M-PFXM-5024FP

Prefix Tackable Panel 50H x 24W No TC

2

$1,108

M-UWR2436E

Univ Wksfc-Rectglr 24Dx36W Edgeband

1

$336

M-UWSKC

Corner Worksurface Support Kit

1

$123

24W Top Cap

2

$80

Prefix Tackable Panel 50H x 30W No TC

4

$2,456

TOTAL EXTENDED LIST: $8,171

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

M-PFXTC24 M-PFXM-5036FP

SEATING

M-EPF2 M-EPS36

ACCESSORIES

MODEL #

83

Includes ∙∙ Assembled panel.

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

All fabric surfaces are tackable. Fabric for PREFIX panels is Railroad cut. For Connector Posts refer to pages 111-94. For Electrical components refer to pages 99-105. Top Cap ordered separately.

Fabric Upcharge

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

Grade A

Grade B

Standard Monolithic Tackable Fabric 35"H

M-PFXM-3520FP M-PFXM-3524FP M-PFXM-3530FP M-PFXM-3536FP M-PFXM-3542FP M-PFXM-3548FP M-PFXM-3560FP M-PFXM-3572FP

35" 35" 35" 35" 35" 35" 35" 35"

20" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

20.2 21.8 23.5 25.2 26.9 28.6 30.3 32.0

1.0 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.1 2.4 3.0 3.6

448 453 458 462 467 470 557 624

14 14 14 14 15 15 18 20

Standard Monolithic Tackable Fabric 42.5"H

M-PFXM-4220FP M-PFXM-4224FP M-PFXM-4230FP M-PFXM-4236FP

42.5" 42.5" 42.5" 42.5" 42.5"

20" 24" 30" 36" 42"

22.0 24.8 27.5 30.3 33.1

1.2 1.5 1.8 2.2 2.6

509 516 522 532 548

15 15 16 16 17

M-PFXM-4248FP M-PFXM-4260FP M-PFXM-4272FP

42.5"

48"

35.8

3.0

564

18

42.5" 42.5"

60" 72"

38.6 41.4

3.7 4.4

679 760

21 23

Standard Monolithic Tackable Fabric 50"H

M-PFXM-5020FP M-PFXM-5024FP M-PFXM-5030FP M-PFXM-5036FP M-PFXM-5042FP M-PFXM-5048FP M-PFXM-5060FP M-PFXM-5072FP

50" 50" 50" 50" 50" 50" 50" 50"

20" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

23.4 26.9 30.5 34.0 37.5 41.1 44.6 48.2

1.4 1.7 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.5 4.3 5.2

532 554 578 614 651 690 825 924

16 16 17 19 20 21 25 28

Standard Monolithic Tackable Fabric 65"H

M-PFXM-6520FP M-PFXM-6524FP M-PFXM-6530FP M-PFXM-6536FP M-PFXM-6542FP M-PFXM-6548FP M-PFXM-6560FP M-PFXM-6572FP

65" 65" 65" 65" 65" 65" 65" 65"

20" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

30.3 34.9 39.5 44.2 48.8 53.4 58.0 62.6

1.9 2.3 2.8 3.4 3.9 4.5 5.6 6.8

546 575 608 648 676 713 839 939

16 17 18 19 20 22 26 28

Description

TABLES STORAGE

List

PREFIX PANEL

M-PFXM-4242FP

ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

84

SIN 711-1

Standard Monolithic Tackable Fabric — Panel

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREFIX

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

Standard Monolithic Non-Tackable Fabric — Panel Includes ∙∙ Assembled panel.

EMERGE

Notes Fabric for PREFIX panels is Railroad cut. For Connector Posts refer to pages 111-94. For Electrical components refer to pages 99-105. Top Cap ordered separately.

PREFIX

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

List PREFIX PANEL

Standard Monolithic Non-Tackable Fabric 35"H

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

Grade A

Grade B

M-PFXB-3520FP M-PFXB-3524FP M-PFXB-3530FP M-PFXB-3536FP M-PFXB-3542FP M-PFXB-3548FP M-PFXB-3560FP M-PFXB-3572FP

35" 35" 35" 35" 35" 35" 35" 35"

20" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

20.2 21.8 23.5 25.2 26.9 28.6 30.3 32.0

1.0 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.1 2.4 3.0 3.6

396 413 419 425 434 443 538 597

11 11 12 12 13 13 16 18

1.2

420

12

1.5 1.8 2.2 2.6

446 474 492 517

12 13 14 15

M-PFXB-4248FP M-PFXB-4260FP M-PFXB-4272FP

42.5"

48"

35.8

3.0

544

16

42.5" 42.5"

60" 72"

38.6 41.4

3.7 4.4

657 727

19 21

Standard Monolithic Non-Tackable Fabric 50"H

M-PFXB-5020FP M-PFXB-5024FP M-PFXB-5030FP M-PFXB-5036FP M-PFXB-5042FP M-PFXB-5048FP M-PFXB-5060FP M-PFXB-5072FP

50" 50" 50" 50" 50" 50" 50" 50"

20" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

23.4 26.9 30.5 34.0 37.5 41.1 44.6 48.2

1.4 1.7 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.5 4.3 5.2

432 480 527 568 614 669 798 883

12 13 15 16 17 19 23 25

Standard Monolithic Non-Tackable Fabric 65"H

M-PFXB-6520FP M-PFXB-6524FP M-PFXB-6530FP M-PFXB-6536FP M-PFXB-6542FP M-PFXB-6548FP M-PFXB-6560FP M-PFXB-6572FP

65" 65" 65" 65" 65" 65" 65" 65"

20" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

30.3 34.9 39.5 44.2 48.8 53.4 58.0 62.6

1.9 2.3 2.8 3.4 3.9 4.5 5.6 6.8

460 509 558 595 641 684 827 914

13 14 15 17 18 19 23 26

M-PFXB-4242FP

SEATING

22.0 24.8 27.5 30.3 33.1

ACCESSORIES

20" 24" 30" 36" 42"

STORAGE

42.5" 42.5" 42.5" 42.5" 42.5"

TABLES

M-PFXB-4220FP M-PFXB-4224FP M-PFXB-4230FP M-PFXB-4236FP

Standard Monolithic Non-Tackable Fabric 42.5"H

SURPASS

Model

WORKSURFACES

Description

Fabric Upcharge

INDEX

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

85

SIN 711-1

Tackable & Non-Tackable Glass — Panel Includes ∙∙ Assembled panel with glass.

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Fabric for panels is Railroad cut. For Connector Posts refer to pages 111-94. For Electrical components refer to pages 99-105. Top Cap ordered separately. Cannot specify a glass stacker to be placed on top of this panel.

List

Description Tackable Glass Panel 50"H

TABLES

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREFIX

Tackable Glass Panel 65"H

STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

86

Non-Tackable Glass Panel 65"H

Glass Upcharge

GradePREFIXGrade GLAZED PANELFrosted A B Glass

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

M-PFXH-5020FGP M-PFXH-5024FGP M-PFXH-5030FGP M-PFXH-5036FGP M-PFXH-5042FGP M-PFXH-5048FGP M-PFXH-5060FGP M-PFXH-5072FGP

50" 50" 50" 50" 50" 50" 50" 50"

20" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

20.8 23.4 26.7 30.5 34.4 38.8 46.0 55.2

1.5 1.8 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.4 4.3 5.1

723 792 862 930 982 999 1214 1405

21 23 25 27 29 31 36 41

42 45 50 54 59 63 71 82

M-PFXH-6520FGP

65"

20"

23.8

2.0

839

24

48

M-PFXH-6524FGP M-PFXH-6530FGP M-PFXH-6536FGP

65" 65" 65" 65"

24" 30" 36" 42"

26.6 30.4 34.3 38.8

2.3 2.8 3.4 3.9

920 1010 1096 1187

26 29 32 34

52 58 63 69

65"

48"

43.2

4.4

1278

37

74

65" 65" 50" 50" 50" 50" 50" 50" 50" 50" 65" 65" 65" 65" 65" 65" 65" 65"

60" 72" 20" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72" 20" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

50.7 60.3 20.8 23.4 26.7 30.5 34.4 38.8 46.0 55.2 23.8 26.6 30.4 34.3 38.8 43.2 50.7 60.3

5.5 6.5 1.5 1.8 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.4 4.3 5.1 2.0 2.3 2.8 3.4 3.9 4.4 5.5 6.5

1466 1697 656 723 781 846 919 998 1124 1328 766 861 940 1030 1119 1202 1405 1610

43 49 19 21 23 25 27 29 33 39 22 25 27 30 33 35 41 47

85 98 38 42 45 50 54 59 67 78 44 49 54 60 65 70 82 93

M-PFXH-6542FGP

Non-Tackable Glass Panel 50"H

Fabric Upcharge

M-PFXH-6548FGP M-PFXH-6560FGP M-PFXH-6572FGP M-PFXB-5020FGP M-PFXB-5024FGP M-PFXB-5030FGP M-PFXB-5036FGP M-PFXB-5042FGP M-PFXB-5048FGP M-PFXB-5060FGP M-PFXB-5072FGP M-PFXB-6520FGP M-PFXB-6524FGP M-PFXB-6530FGP M-PFXB-6536FGP M-PFXB-6542FGP M-PFXB-6548FGP M-PFXB-6560FGP M-PFXB-6572FGP

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

15" & 30" High Glass Stackers Includes ∙∙ Assembled glass stacker

Notes EMERGE

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Fabric for panels is Railroad cut. Only 1 stacker per panel. Glass stacker must be installed in top position. Glass Stackers will not support overhead storage. For Connector Posts refer to pages 111-94. Top Cap ordered separately. Cannot be used on the tackable & non-tackable Glass Panel.

PREFIX

Glass Stacker 15" H

W

Wt.

Cubes

Core

Frosted Glass

M-PFXS-1520G M-PFXS-1524G M-PFXS-1530G M-PFXS-1536G M-PFXS-1542G M-PFXS-1548G M-PFXS-1560G M-PFXS-1572G M-PFXS-3020G

15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 30"

20" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72" 20"

8.3 9.4 10.9 12.5 14.1 15.7 18.8 22.0 14.3

1.9 1.9 1.9 2.2 2.6 2.9 3.6 4.3 3.3

463 508 575 593 658 708 810 957 483

25 28 32 33 36 39 45 52 27

M-PFXS-3024G M-PFXS-3030G M-PFXS-3036G M-PFXS-3042G M-PFXS-3048G M-PFXS-3060G

30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

16.8 19.8 23 26.2 29.4 35.6

3.3 3.3 3.8 4.4 4.9 6.2

527 592 611 673 722 821

30 34 35 38 41 47

STORAGE

H

TABLES

Model

SURPASS

Glass Stacker 30" H

Glass Upcharge

WORKSURFACES

Description

List

ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

87

SIN 711-1

15" High Fabric Stackers (Tackable) Includes ∙∙ Assembled fabric stacker

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Fabric for panels is Railroad cut. Fabric stackers will support overhead storage Cannot be used on the Tackable or Non-Tackable Glass Panel. Can stack up to 3 stackers. Total panel height including stackers cannot exceed 80"h. Top Cap ordered separately. For Connector Posts refer to pages 111-94. Cannot be stacked on top of a glass stacker.

Fabric Stacker 15"H (tackable)

List

Fabric Upcharge

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

Grade A

Grade B

M-PFXS-1520F M-PFXS-1524F M-PFXS-1530F M-PFXS-1536F M-PFXS-1542F M-PFXS-1548F M-PFXS-1560F M-PFXS-1572F

15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

20" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

6.0 6.8 8.1 9.3 10.5 11.7 14.2 17.2

1.9 1.9 1.9 2.2 2.6 2.9 3.6 4.3

382 408 442 475 511 548 617 715

6 7 7 8 8 9 10 12

Description

TABLES

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREFIX

STORAGE

∙∙ To be used on panels and stackers

INDEX

SEATING

Includes

ACCESSORIES

PREFIX Panel Top Cap

88

∙∙ Top Cap

Notes

Description

Model

W

Wt.

PREFIX Panel Top Cap

M-PFXTC20 M-PFXTC24 M-PFXTC30 M-PFXTC36 M-PFXTC42 M-PFXTC48 M-PFXTC60 M-PFXTC72

20" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 4.0

Cubes

List

0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7

40 40 50 65 75 83 95 100

PREFIX Top Cap

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

Frameless Glass Includes ∙∙ Frameless Glass stacker and side caps.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Prefix Frameless glass does not have the ability to do variable height applications ∙∙ Frameless glass can span multiple panels ∙∙ Unit itself serves as the top cap

PREFIX

Frameless Glass, 7" height

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-PFXFGS-0720 M-PFXFGS-0724 M-PFXFGS-0730 M-PFXFGS-0736 M-PFXFGS-0742 M-PFXFGS-0748 M-PFXFGS-0754 M-PFXFGS-0760 M-PFXFGS-0766

7" 7" 7" 7" 7" 7" 7" 7" 7"

20 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66

18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

0.7 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 2.2

371 424 474 492 528 570 598 632 688

Frosted Glass Upcharge 37 40 43 47 50 53 57 60 63

M-PFXFGS-0772

7"

72

36

2.4

720

67

M-PFXFGS-1520 M-PFXFGS-1524 M-PFXFGS-1530 M-PFXFGS-1536 M-PFXFGS-1542

15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

20 24 30 36 42

18 20 22 24 26

0.7 0.8 1 1.2 1.4

398 450 518 556 624

40 43 47 50 53

M-PFXFGS-1548

15"

48

28

1.6

689

57

M-PFXFGS-1554 M-PFXFGS-1560 M-PFXFGS-1566 M-PFXFGS-1572

15" 15" 15" 15"

54 60 66 72

30 32 34 36

1.8 2 2.2 2.4

768 816 864 901

60 63 67 70

STORAGE

W

TABLES

H

SURPASS

Frameless Glass, 15" height

Model

WORKSURFACES

Description

ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

89

REFERENCE

PREFIX

SIN 711-1

Sliding Door Includes

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Attaches to PREFIX panel(s) 50"H, 65"H and 80"H. Tape measure and Philips screwdriver needed for installation Sliding Door Mounting Kit specified separately. Door available in Frosted Acrylic finish only. When attaching to 30", 36", 42" and 48" wide panels, a sliding door mounting kit is necessary.

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Sliding Door.

Description

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-PFXSD5042 M-PFXSD6542 M-PFXSD8042

50" 65" 80"

42" 42" 42"

28 38 46

5.5 7.1 8.6

1519 1583 1645

Sliding Door Mounting Kit Includes ∙∙ Sliding Door Mounting Kit

Notes ∙∙ Mounting kit width must match width of the panel it is mounting on.

Description

Model

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

PREFIX sliding door mounting kit PREFIX sliding door mounting kit PREFIX sliding door mounting kit PREFIX sliding door mounting kit

M-PFXSDKIT30 M-PFXSDKIT36 M-PFXSDKIT42 M-PFXSDKIT48

30" 36" 42" 48"

4 5 6 7

0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5

238 255 270 281

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

TABLES

SURPASS

PREFIX Sliding Door

Model

90

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

Hinged Door Kits Includes

top view

∙∙ Door

EMERGE

Notes For use with 80" high PREFIX configuration panel height Keyed alike option not available on door panels. Order door handle separately Door is non-handed. For left of right hand: change to desired swing at time of installation Top Cap ordered separately.

PREFIX

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Right hand shown.

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

PREFIX Door Panel - NO Top Cap

M-PFXDP8042P

80"

42"

155

7.3

1941

Door Handle

M-DOORLEVER

2

0.1

359

WORKSURFACES

Description

SURPASS TABLES

Wire Management Trays Includes ∙∙ Tray

STORAGE

Notes ∙∙ Wire management trays are inserted into the raceway in the panel. ∙∙ Used to manage power and data cords, etc. ∙∙ Trays are galvanized steel. No paint option.

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

Wire Management Tray

M-PFXWT20 M-PFXWT24 M-PFXWT30 M-PFXWT36 M-PFXWT42 M-PFXWT48 M-PFXWT60 M-PFXWT72

20" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 6.0

0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.9

11 13 15 19 22 25 30 33

SEATING

Model

ACCESSORIES

Description

INDEX

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

91

REFERENCE

PREFIX

SIN 711-1

Extended Straight Connector Includes

Notes ∙∙ Specify post height as height of tallest panel at the connection. ∙∙ Connection post adds 21/4" to panel run.

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Connector post, post cap, 2 panel to post connectors and hardware.

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Description Extended Straight Connector

Model

H

Wt.

Cubes

List

35" 42" 50" 57" 65" 72" 80"

1.8 2.3 2.7 3.2 3.6 4 4.5

0.5 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9

139 150 160 171 182 192 203

Model

H

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-PFXC-35L M-PFXC-42L M-PFXC-50L M-PFXC-57L M-PFXC-65L M-PFXC-72L M-PFXC-80L

35" 42" 50" 57" 65" 72" 80"

1.8 2.3 2.7 3.2 3.6 4 4.5

0.5 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9

139 150 160 171 182 192 203

M-PFXC-35S M-PFXC-42S M-PFXC-50S M-PFXC-57S M-PFXC-65S M-PFXC-72S M-PFXC-80S

"L" Connector

TABLES

Includes ∙∙ Connector post, post cap, 2 panel to post connectors and hardware.

Notes

Description "L" Connector

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

∙∙ Specify post height as height of tallest panel at the connection. ∙∙ Connection post adds 21/4" to panel run

92

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

"T" Connector Includes ∙∙ Connector post, post cap, 3 panel to post connectors and hardware.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Specify post height as height of tallest panel at the connection. ∙∙ Connection post adds 21/4" to panel run

PREFIX

Description

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-PFXC-35T M-PFXC-42T M-PFXC-50T M-PFXC-57T M-PFXC-65T M-PFXC-72T M-PFXC-80T

35" 42" 50" 57" 65" 72" 80"

1.8 2.3 2.7 3.2 3.6 4 4.5

0.5 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9

139 150 160 171 182 192 203

Model

H

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-PFXC-35X M-PFXC-42X M-PFXC-50X M-PFXC-57X M-PFXC-65X M-PFXC-72X M-PFXC-80X

35" 42" 50" 57" 65" 72" 80"

1.8 2.3 2.7 3.2 3.6 4 4.5

0.5 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9

139 150 160 171 182 192 203

SURPASS

H

WORKSURFACES

"T" Connector

Model

"X" Connector Includes

TABLES

∙∙ Connector post, post cap, 4 panel to post connectors and hardware.

Notes

"X" Connector

ACCESSORIES

Description

STORAGE

∙∙ Specify post height as height of tallest panel at the connection. ∙∙ Connection post adds 21/4" to panel run

SEATING INDEX

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

93

SIN 711-1

PREFIX 120 Degree 2-Way Connector Includes ∙∙ Connector post, 120 post cap, 2 panel to post connectors and hardware.

Notes ∙∙ Specify post height as height of tallest panel at the connection.

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREFIX

Prefix 120 Degree 2-Way Connector 35H Prefix 120 Degree 2-Way Connector 42.5H Prefix 120 Degree 2-Way Connector 50H Prefix 120 Degree 2-Way Connector 57.5H Prefix 120 Degree 2-Way Connector 65H Prefix 120 Degree 2-Way Connector 72H Prefix 120 Degree 2-Way Connector 80H

Model

H

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-PFXC-35V M-PFXC-42V M-PFXC-50V M-PFXC-57V M-PFXC-65V M-PFXC-72V M-PFXC-80V

35" 42.5" 50" 57.5" 65" 72" 80"

6 6 6 8 8 9 9

0.4 0.4 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.9 0.9

148 160 172 183 195 206 217

PREFIX 120 Degree 3-Way Connector Includes ∙∙ Connector post, 120 post cap, 3 panel to post connectors and hardware.

Notes ∙∙ Specify post height as height of tallest panel at the connection.

Description Prefix 120 Degree 3-Way Connector 35H Prefix 120 Degree 3-Way Connector 42.5H Prefix 120 Degree 3-Way Connector 50H Prefix 120 Degree 3-Way Connector 57.5H Prefix 120 Degree 3-Way Connector 65H Prefix 120 Degree 3-Way Connector 72H Prefix 120 Degree 3-Way Connector 80H

Model

H

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-PFXC-35Y M-PFXC-42Y M-PFXC-50Y M-PFXC-57Y M-PFXC-65Y M-PFXC-72Y M-PFXC-80Y

35" 42.5" 50" 57.5" 65" 72" 80"

6 6 6 8 8 9 9

0.4 0.4 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.9 0.9

148 160 172 183 195 206 217

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

TABLES

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Description

94

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

Straight Connector Kit Includes ∙∙ Panel-to-panel connector and hardware

Notes EMERGE

∙∙ Available in black finish only

Description

Model

M-PFXC-S

n

Cubes

List

0.0

0.5

9

WORKSURFACES

Panel End Covers Includes ∙∙ End trim, connector, hardware and end trim clips.

SURPASS

Notes ∙∙ Specify cover height as height of tallest panel at the end. ∙∙ Connection post adds 21/4" to panel run

Panel End Covers

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-PFXC-35E M-PFXC-42E M-PFXC-50E M-PFXC-57E M-PFXC-65E M-PFXC-72E M-PFXC-80E

35" 42" 50" 57" 65" 72" 80"

3 3 4 5 5 6 6

0.5 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9

74 79 83 88 93 98 102

ACCESSORIES

H

STORAGE

Model

TABLES

Description

PREFIX

Straight Connector Kit

Wt.

SEATING INDEX

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

95

Includes ∙∙ Wall mount, wall mount top cap, panel to wall mount connector and hardware.

Notes ∙∙ Specify cover height as height of tallest panel to be mounted to wall. Only one panel can be mounted to the wall. ∙∙ Connection post adds 21/4" to panel run

Description

WORKSURFACES

Panel Wall Mount Kit

SURPASS

SIN 711-1

Panel Wall Mount Kit

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREFIX

Model

H

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-PFXC-35W M-PFXC-42W M-PFXC-50W M-PFXC-57W M-PFXC-65W M-PFXC-72W M-PFXC-80W

35" 42" 50" 57" 65" 72" 80"

4 4 5 6 6 7 7

0.5 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9

160 178 194 207 222 235 249

Panel Wall Strip Kit Includes

Notes ∙∙ Available in 65" height. ∙∙ M-PFXC-65YEB is a pair of ends. M-PFXC-65YM is the middle unit. ∙∙ All wall track system worksurfaces must be floor supported by an end panel, pedestal or lateral file, with one floor support at each end of the worksurface run and a maximum spacing of 8' between floor supports.

Description Panel Wall Mount Kit

Model

H

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-PFXC-65YEB M-PFXC-65YM

65" 65"

6 3

0.7 0.7

191 184

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

TABLES

∙∙ Wall mount and hardware.

96

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

Variable Height Connector Kit Includes ∙∙ Connector, trim and hardware.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Use for X, T or L variable height panel connections.

Variable Height Connector Kit

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-PFXC-07HL M-PFXC-15HL M-PFXC-22HL M-PFXC-30HL

7.5" 15" 22" 30"

2.0 2.0 3.0 3.0

0.2 0.4 0.4 0.4

74 79 93 111

Model

H

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-PFXC-07HLS M-PFXC-15HLS M-PFXC-22HLS M-PFXC-30HLS

7.5" 15" 22" 30"

2.0 2.0 3.0 3.0

0.2 0.4 0.4 0.4

74 79 94 111

SURPASS

H

WORKSURFACES

Model

PREFIX

Description

In-Line Variable Height Finishing Kit Includes ∙∙ Trim cap, trim and hardware

TABLES

Notes ∙∙ Use for in-line variable height panel connections.

ACCESSORIES

In-Line Variable Height Finishing Kit

STORAGE

Description

SEATING INDEX

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

97

SIN 711-1

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

TABLES

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREFIX

98

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX

Byrne Electrical System Capabilities

WORKSURFACES

Guidelines For Byrne Electrical Specification Consult with the electrician and computer support staff to determine the electrical option you will be using: 3 utility circuits + 1 isolated/dedicated circuit. 2 utility circuits + 2 isolated/dedicated circuit.

2.

Determine the locations, quantities and circuits of the duplex outlets.

3.

Determine the requirements (if any) for isolated/dedicated circuits.

4.

Specify the appropriate double block, single block and pass-through power harnesses. Harness widths must correspond to the applicable panel width. The integrated panel-to-panel power jumper cable stretches approximately 3" to transverse 2-way 180° “S”, 2-way 90° “L”, 3-way “T”, and 4-way “X” connections.

5.

Determine the location, quantity and type of power source feed(s) needed.

NEUTRAL-1 ISOLATED GROUND GROUND

STORAGE

NEUTRAL-2

M-ED4 CIRCUIT 4 M-ED3 ISOLATED/ CIRCUIT 3 DEDICATED

TABLES

GRAY WHITE GREEN/ YELLOW GREEN PINK

M-ED2 CIRCUIT 2

HOT-4

BLUE

HOT-3

RED

HOT-2

BLACK

HOT-1

GRAY

M-ED2 CIRCUIT 2

SEATING

M-ED1 CIRCUIT 1

M-ED3 M-ED4 CIRCUIT 3 CIRCUIT 4 ISOLATED/ ISOLATED/ DEDICATED DEDICATED

ACCESSORIES

3 utility circuits + 1 isolated/dedicated circuit is the standard configuration of the PREFIX electrical system.

NEUTRAL-2 NEUTRAL-1 ISOLATED GROUND GROUND

PINK

HOT-4

BLUE

HOT-3

RED

HOT-2

BLACK

HOT-1

INDEX

WHITE GREEN/ YELLOW GREEN

SURPASS

1.

M-ED1 CIRCUIT 1

PREFIX

The Maxon 4-Circuit/8-Wire power system conforms to National Electrical Code requirements. However, some variations may exist in the local authority of electrical code standards. The specifier or user is responsible for confirming code standard compliance in these locations before specification and ordering. The availability of power components and systems does not constitute local code approved by Maxon Furniture Inc. All electrical installation work on Maxon power systems should be done under the supervision of a licensed electrician or approved electrical contractor.

EMERGE

NOTE ON THE SPECIFICATION AND INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

REFERENCE

∙∙ PREFIX features a Byrne 4-circuit/8-wire modular power distribution system. The standard power configuration provides three utility circuits, which share a common Neutral and Ground, plus an isolated/dedicated fourth circuit, with an independent Neutral and Ground. As an option, the system can also provide 2 utility circuits + 2 isolated circuits. ∙∙ The power distribution system provides access to multiple electrical outlets and circuits within the same panel. ∙∙ The standard power distribution through the base-level raceway can branch electrical service up to the work surface level as needed. ∙∙ Each electrical circuit is rated 120volts/20amp. Up to four 20 Amp circuits may be accessed from a 3-phase power source, and up to three circuits may be used with a single-phase source. ∙∙ The electrical system is UL LISTED.

2 utility circuits + 2 isolated/dedicated circuits provide the convenience of ample utility power with an additional isolated circuit for more extensive computer applications. *Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

99

SIN 711-1

Maximum Receptacle Capacity In Panel Raceway Width

Max 1 Duplex receptacle per panel side

24"

Max 2 Duplex receptacles per panel side

n

30" and wider

n

Various Electrical Layouts

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREFIX

"L" corner

"T"connection

"X"connection

∙∙ When ending power in two return panels, wiring pigtails must be returned to original panel run. ∙∙ To power a 3-Way panel connection, specify at least one double-block harness.

∙∙ To power a 4-Way panel connection from one direction, specify at least two double block harness.

4-Circuit / 8-Wire Sample Electrical Layout

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

TABLES

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

straight line

PREFIX Cabling Capacity

INDEX

Power Pole

Raceway

100

X-Connection

T-Connection

S/L Connection

Data Only

16 CAT 6 Cables

22 CAT 6 Cables

28 CAT 6 Cables

Data with Power

8 CAT 6 Cables

14 CAT 6 Cables

18 CAT 6 Cables

Data Only

77 CAT 6 cables

Data with Power

25 CAT 6 cables

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

Byrne Power-In Wiring Notes ∙∙ M-EPF2 - For use in all Maxon Panel Systems to connect system from a building

∙∙ M-EPF3 - (168" Long) For use in all Maxon Panel Systems. M-EPF3 connects to building junction box and fits power poles up to a 12' ceiling. ∙∙ Refer to Electrical Specification Guidelines on pages 99-100.

Power In-Feed through Side Receptacle (72') Power In-Feed through End or Power Pole (Ceiling-168")

M-EPF2

Model M-EPF2 M-EPF3

n n

Wt.

List

.5 .5

301 301

WORKSURFACES

Byrne Electrical Pass-Through Wiring Notes Allows you to take power through a panel raceway. Duplex outlets cannot be used with M-EP Pass-Through wiring. EPS Single-Block Pass-Through wiring will allow the use of one outlet per panel side. Pass-Through wiring runs from 10" inside on panels, through the connection and 10" into the next panel in the run. Refer to Electrical Specification Guidelines on pages 99-100.

Description

n n n n n n n n n n n n n

List

1.2 1.5 1.7 2 2.3 2.8 4 1.5 1.8 2 2.3 2.6 3.1 4

141 156 163 170 188 203 226 163 170 188 197 214 238 266

ACCESSORIES

n

Wt.

STORAGE

Single-Block Pass-Through Harness

Model M-EP24 M-EP30 M-EP36 M-EP42 M-EP48 M-EP60 M-EP72 M-EPS24 M-EPS30 M-EPS36 M-EPS42 M-EPS48 M-EPS60 M-EPS72

TABLES

Pass-Through Harness

SURPASS

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

PREFIX

Description

EMERGE

junction box. It also enters into a panel from the right or left (it pivots) and must mount in to an M-EH model number (Electrical Wiring Harness) or an M-EPS model number (Single Block).

SEATING INDEX

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

101

REFERENCE

PREFIX

SIN 711-1

Byrne Electric Duplex Outlet Receptacle Notes

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Available with 3 integrated circuits 1, 2, or 3 (M-ED1, M-ED2, M-ED3) and 1 isolated circuit

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

4 (M-ED4) or 2 integrated circuits 1 and 2 (M-ED1, M-ED2) and 2 isolated circuits 3 and 4 (M-ED3D, M-ED4). Each duplex outlet receptacle is rated at 15 amps. Each circuit has a 20 amp maximum capacity (depending upon building wiring). Power-In Wiring (M-EPF2) plugs into Duplex Wiring Harness (M-EH or M-EPS) in place of a Duplex Outlet Receptale. Duplex Outlets may be added at any time by removing the outlet cover plate and plugging the Duplex Outlet Receptacle into the Duplex Wiring Harness. Isolated circuits are designated with an orange triangle. Refer to Electrical Specification Guidelines on pages 99-100.

Description Byrne Electric Duplex Outlet Circuit

Model M-ED1 M-ED2 M-ED3 M-ED3D M-ED4

Wt.

Cubes

List

1 1 1 1 1

0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1

47 47 47 47 47

n n n n n

Byrne Chicago Outlet Box Notes

TABLES

∙∙ For hard wiring by an electrician to meet Chicago City Codes. ∙∙ Cannot be used back-to-back – one Duplex per side, per panel.

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

Description Chicago Outlet Box - Base Raceway

Model M-ECH1

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

1

0.1

114

Byrne New York Junction Box Notes ∙∙ New York Junction Box provides special Power-In Wiring to meet New York City electrical code. Intended for use in 30"

SEATING

wide panel. Use in larger size panels would require modification by certified electrician at install.

Description

Model M-EPFX

n

Wt.

List

.5

279

INDEX

Power In-Feed NY Junction Box

102

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

PREFIX Integrated Power Pole 78" High Includes ∙∙ Power Pole and trim.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ The Integrated Power Pole stacks on a 2-Way, 3-Way or 4-Way Connector Post.

PREFIX

Model

Wt.

Cubes

List

PREFIX Integrated Power Pole (For 44"/57" H Panels-78"H)

M-PFXC-78P

14

0.5

420

WORKSURFACES

Description

SURPASS TABLES STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

103

REFERENCE

PREFIX

SIN 711-1

Byrne Electrical Duplex Wiring Harness Includes

EMERGE

∙∙ Built-in Jumper.

Notes

TABLES

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

∙∙ When using M-EH Series Harnesses for duplex outlet capabilities in panels, please specify the corresponding length of ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

harness to match the panel width. All outlet placements are 12" from the edge of the panel. Refer to Electrical Specification Guidelines on pages 99-100. When specifying for GSA applications, add suffix (G) and reference list price GSA (G). Standard model without suffix (G) is not on GSA Contract (NOC).

Description

Model

W

Wt.

List

2 2 3 3 3

203 225 249 260 269

Single Block Duplex Harness 24W Double Block Duplex Harness 30W Double Block Duplex Harness 36W Double Block Duplex Harness 42W Double Block Duplex Harness 48W

M-EH24 (G) M-EH30 (G) M-EH36 (G) M-EH42 (G) M-EH48 (G)

n

n

24 30 36 42 48

Double Block Duplex Harness 60W

M-EH60 (G)

n

60

4

EX 288

Double Block Duplex Harness 72W

M-EH72 (G)

n

72

4

311

n n n

List GSA (G)

D

ED

U CL

203 225 260 270 278 300 322

Desk-Height Power & Data Receptacle Includes

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

∙∙ 2 simplex electrical receptacles, 2 open ports for voice/data jacks, 6’ cord with plug.

Notes ∙∙ Works in conjunction with scalloped-shaped cutouts in worksurfaces. ∙∙ Allows the convenience of worksurface-height receptacles.

Description

Model M-DOME

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

.8

0.2

349

INDEX

SEATING

Desk Height Power and Data Receptacle

104

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

Telecommunication Receptacles Notes ∙∙ Faceplates and Jacks available in black only.

EMERGE

Description

Model n n n n n n

Wt.

List

.1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1

24 24 41 46 137 11

EXCLUDED

WORKSURFACES

M-FP3RJ45 M-FP4RJ45 M-SIJRJ11 M-SIJRJ45 M-SIJRJ456S M-QPBLANK

PREFIX

3-Port Faceplate 4-Port Faceplate Snap In Jack RJ11 Cat 3 Snap In Jack R45 Cat 5E Snap In Jack R45 Cat 6 Blank Faceplate Insert

SURPASS TABLES STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

105

PREFIX

SIN 711-1

Overhead Cabinets with Flipper Door REFERENCE

∙∙ Overhead cabinets, core removable locks, two keys and attaching brackets.

EMERGE

Includes

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

PREFIX

Notes

Description

Model

WORKSURFACES

Flipper Painted Door - Panel Mount

Flipper Painted Door - Wall Mount

SURPASS TABLES

Overhead Cabinets have exposed back with backsplash. Ball bearing Overhead Door slides. Door recedes over top of Overhead Cabinet. 60" W & 72"W Overhead Cabinets have 2 doors. Please specify models specific to Panel Systems or Wall Mount applications. Refer to page 108 for keyed alike option.

M-USOH1524F M-USOH1530F M-USOH1536F M-USOH1542F M-USOH1548F M-USOH1560F M-USOH1572F

n

M-UWMSOH1524F M-UWMSOH1530F M-UWMSOH1536F M-UWMSOH1542F M-UWMSOH1548F M-UWMSOH1560F

n n

M-USOH1524FE M-USOH1530FE M-USOH1536FE M-USOH1542FE M-USOH1548FE

n n

Flipper Easy Assist Painted Door

n n n n n n

n n n n

n n n

H

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

35 38 41 46 52 62 72

3.6 4.4 5.3 6.1 6.9 8.6 15.1

532 552 586 628 685 923 1058

15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

35 38 41 46 52 62

3.6 4.4 5.3 6.1 6.9 8.6

532 552 586 628 685 923

15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48"

35 38 41 46 52

3.6 4.4 5.3 6.1 6.9

825 865 911 943 993

Ready-to-Assemble Overhead Cabinet

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

Includes ∙∙ Overhead cabinets, core removable locks, two keys, cabinet and assembly hardware.

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

60" and 72" wide cabinets have two doors. Overhead Cabinets have exposed back. Does not come preassembled. Refer to page 108 for keyed alike option.

INDEX

SEATING

Description

106

Panel Mount Ready-to-Assemble Overhead Cabinet with Flipper Door

Model M-USOC24R M-USOC30R M-USOC36R M-USOC42R M-USOC48R M-USOC60R M-USOC72R

n n n n n n n

H

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

21 24 27 30 33 42 49

1.6 1.6 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.5 3.0

325 339 359 385 420 566 712

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

Overhead Cabinets with Hinged Door Includes ∙∙ Overhead cabinets, core removable locks, two keys and attaching brackets.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Overhead Cabinets have exposed back with backsplash. ∙∙ 24"-36" cabinets have 2 doors. 42"-60" have 4 doors. ∙∙ Refer to page 108 for keyed alike option.

Model n n n n n

H

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

16" 16" 16" 16" 16"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48"

35 38 41 46 52

3.6 4.4 5.3 6.1 6.9

1035 1075 1120 1151 1199

WORKSURFACES

M-USOH1524H M-USOH1530H M-USOH1536H M-USOH1542H M-USOH1548H

PREFIX

Description Hinged Painted Door - Panel Mount

SURPASS

Overhead Cabinets with Steel Sliding Door Includes

TABLES

∙∙ Overhead cabinets and attaching brackets.

Notes

Panel Mount Steel Sliding Door

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-USOH1524S M-USOH1530S M-USOH1536S M-USOH1542S M-USOH1548S M-USOH1560S

15"

16"

24"

35

3.6

642

n

15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

16" 16" 16" 16" 16"

30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

38 41 46 52 62

4.4 5.3 6.1 6.9 8.6

665 697 739 790 1108

n n n n

SEATING

H n

Model

ACCESSORIES

Description

STORAGE

∙∙ Overhead Cabinets have exposed back with backsplash. ∙∙ Please specify models specific to Panel Systems or Wall-Mount applications.

INDEX

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

107

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREFIX

Upmount Kits for Overheads Includes ∙∙ Consists of two upmount brackets, full back panel and required installation hardware.

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Allows mounting of an assembled overhead cabinet up to 15" above height of panel. Brackets require a clearance of 61/2" below bottom of overhead cabinet. Width must correspond with width of panel frame or two panel frames joined directly inline. Full back panels adds 1/2" to depth of overhead case. Full back panel only used when upmounting cabinet. ∙∙ Cannot be used with RTA models.

Description

Model

Panel Mount Ready-to-Assemble Overhead Cabinet with Flipper Door

M-USUM24 M-USUM30 M-USUM36 M-USUM42 M-USUM48 M-USUM60

n n n n n n

H

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25" 14.25"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

7 8 10 11 12 16

0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6

227 242 257 268 278 309

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

SIN 711-1

TABLES

Overhead Cabinet Locks Includes ∙∙ Each M-LC kit includes one core and core removal tool, two keys and instructions.

STORAGE

Notes ∙∙ Order required quantity of M-LC Kits and specify key number between 101 and 225 for each

keyed-alike group.

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

Description

Model M-LC M-MK

Lock Core Kit Master Key (1)

Example

n n

Wt.

Cubes

List

1 1

0.1 0.1

33 20

Lock Core shown in application.

How To Specify: Ordering Example:

INDEX

M

108

key number

item number

-

L

C

·

1

0

1

E

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

Shelf Organizer Notes ∙∙ Vertically divides and aligns books, magazines and folders. ∙∙ Fits all Universal Overhead Cabinets and Shelves. ∙∙ Not compatible with Overhead Cabinets with Sliding Doors.

EMERGE

Description Shelf Organizer

Model M-PSO14

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

6

0.4

67

PREFIX WORKSURFACES

Ready-to-Assemble (RTA) Overhead Shelf Includes ∙∙ Straight Shelf with Steel End Panels.

Notes

Description Panel Mount RTA Overhead Shelf

Model n n n n n n

H

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

5 5/8" 5 5/8" 5 5/8" 5 5/8" 5 5/8" 5 5/8" 5 5/8"

11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37" 11.37"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

10 11 12 13 14 16 18

1.9 1.9 1.9 2.1 2.4 3 3.5

162 170 182 201 222 249 273

TABLES

M-USSC24R M-USSC30R M-USSC36R M-USSC42R M-USSC48R M-USSC60R M-USSC72R

n

SURPASS

∙∙ Overhead Shelves have exposed back. ∙∙ Does not come preassembled.

STORAGE

Overhead Shelves Includes

ACCESSORIES

∙∙ Straight Shelf with Steel End Panels.

Notes ∙∙ Overhead Shelves are 8" High and 14" Deep. ∙∙ Overhead Shelves have exposed back with backsplash.

Universal Open Straight Shelf

Model n n n n n n

H

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 8"

14" 14" 14" 14" 14" 14" 14"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60" 72"

11 13 14 17 19 23 23

1.0 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.6 2 3.6

268 278 283 288 293 309 381

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

M-UOSS24 M-UOSS30 M-UOSS36 M-UOSS42 M-UOSS48 M-UOSS60 M-UOSS72

n

SEATING

Description

109

SIN 711-1

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

TABLES

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREFIX

110

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

Task Lighting Includes ∙∙ Fluorescent light bulb, hanger bars.

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

EMERGE

Notes Light available in Black finish only. Mount under Overhead Storage Cabinet or Shelf. For Chicago version with Fuse Plug, order FP option. Cord cover is metal construction. Specify paint finish option. 6 ft. cord.

Description

M-USL24 M-USL30 M-USL42 M-USL54

Task Light 24W or greater-Fuse Plug Task Light 30W or greater-Fuse Plug Task Light 42W or greater-Fuse Plug

15 20 30

M-USL24FP M-USL30FP M-USL42FP

n

Task Light 54W or greater-Fuse Plug

40

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

7" 7" 7" 7"

18" 24.25" 36.25" 48.25"

6 7 9 11

0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4

226 254 285 332

7" 7" 7"

18.25" 24.25" 36.25"

6 7 9

0.4 0.4 0.4

314 344

n

2" 2" 2"

M-USL54FP

n

2"

7"

48.25"

11

0.4

407

M-CCM10 M-CCM15 M-CCM20

n

10" 15" 20"

2" 2" 2"

2" 2" 2"

2 2 2

0.2 0.2 0.2

32 34 45

n n n

n

n n

375

SURPASS

Cord Cover (Manager) Cord Cover (Manager) Cord Cover (Manager)

H 2" 2" 2" 2"

n

WORKSURFACES

Model

15 20 30 40

PREFIX

Wattage

Task Light 24W or greater Task Light 30W or greater Task Light 42W or greater Task Light 54W or greater

TABLES

Universal Overhead Task Lighting Includes ∙∙ Fluorescent light bulb, 9 foot cord, 4 cord clips, mounting bars.

Light available in black finish only. Mount under Overhead Storage Cabinet or Shelf. For Chicago version with Fuse Plug, order FP option. Excluded from GSA Description

M-USLO24FP M-USLO30FP M-USLO42FP M-USLO60FP

n n n n n n n n

H

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

1.1" 1.1" 1.1" 1.1"

3.7" 3.7" 3.7" 3.7"

24" 30" 42" 60"

5 7 10 12

0.4 0.6 0.9 1.1

187 207 233 284

1.1" 1.1" 1.1" 1.1"

3.7" 3.7" 3.7" 3.7"

24" 30" 42" 60"

5 7 10 12

0.4 0.6 0.9 1.1

197 223 247 305

INDEX

Universal Overhead Task Light 24W - Fuse Plug Universal Overhead Task Light 30W - Fuse Plug Universal Overhead Task Light 42W - Fuse Plug Universal Overhead Task Light 60W - Fuse Plug

Model M-USLO24 M-USLO30 M-USLO42 M-USLO60

SEATING

Universal Overhead Task Light 24W Universal Overhead Task Light 30W Universal Overhead Task Light 42W Universal Overhead Task Light 60W

ACCESSORIES

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

STORAGE

ED

UD EXCL

Notes

For other lighting options see the Accessories section.

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

111

SIN 711-1

Universal Accessory Panel Rail and Accessories Notes ∙∙ The Universal Panel Accessory rail is 5" high and provides a continuous full-width slot for mounting personal accessory

components. ∙∙ The rails are designed for use on panels only. ∙∙ Accessories can be used only on the Universal Accessory Rail. ∙∙ Diagonal trays are non-handed.

Description

Model

H

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

.5" .5" .5" .5" .5" .5"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

5 6 7 8 9 11

0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5

192 206 216 229 238 277

M-ACCRAIL24 M-ACCRAIL30 M-ACCRAIL36 M-ACCRAIL42 M-ACCRAIL48 M-ACCRAIL60

n

n

5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5"

M-PS21

n

1.75"

7"

21"

3

0.5

135

Letter Tray

M-LT

n

1.7"

9"

13"

0.5

0.5

132

Binder Bin

M-SB

n

8.5"

5.2"

3

0.8

0.8

132

Diagonal Tray - (Non-handed) (3)

M-DT

n

8.5"

9.5"

4.5"

2

0.3

182

Universal Accessory Rail

Personal Shelf (21")

n n n n

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

TABLES

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREFIX

112

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

File Pocket

M-FP

n

8.9"

12"

2

0.3

135

Paper Clip

M-CLIP2

n

1.9"

5"

1

0.2

135

M-SMTRAY

n

1.8"

6.8"

1

0.1

94

M-TB

n

5.25

5"

1

0.2

105

Description

Model

REFERENCE

Universal Accessory Panel Rail and Accessories Continued...

EMERGE PREFIX

Small Paper Clip Tray

WORKSURFACES

Tool Box

SURPASS TABLES

Panel Accessories Notes ∙∙ M-RCKO is for replacement and reconfigure only.

Power/Data Knockout Cover

Model M-RCKO

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

.01

0.3

10

Cantilever Double Coat Hook

M-DGH

n

0.3

0.3

32

ACCESSORIES

EXCLUDED

STORAGE

Description

SEATING INDEX

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

113

REFERENCE

PREFIX

SIN 711-1

Universal Panel Mounted Whiteboard Includes

Notes ∙∙ Panel Mount can be moved from space to space as needed. ∙∙ This surface is a dry erase application.

Description

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

Panel Mounted Whiteboard 13H x 24W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 13H x 30W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 13H x 36W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 13H x 42W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 13H x 48W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 13H x 60W

M-PMWB1324 M-PMWB1330 M-PMWB1336 M-PMWB1342 M-PMWB1348 M-PMWB1360

n n n n n n

13" 13" 13" 13" 13" 13"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

6 7 9 10 12 15

1 1.3 1.5 1.7 2 2.4

359 392 411 421 430 443

Panel Mounted Whiteboard 26H x 24W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 26H x 30W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 26H x 36W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 26H x 42W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 26H x 48W Panel Mounted Whiteboard 26H x 60W

M-PMWB2624 M-PMWB2630 M-PMWB2636 M-PMWB2642 M-PMWB2648 M-PMWB2660

n n n n n n

26" 26" 26" 26" 26" 26"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

9 11 13 15 18 23

1.9 2.3 2.8 3.2 3.6 4.5

430 446 453 463 472 485

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

TABLES

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Panel mounted whiteboard and marker tray.

114

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

PREFIX REFERENCE

Universal Fabric Tackboard - Wall & Panel Mounted Includes ∙∙ Fabric Tackboard

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Panel Mount can be moved from space to space as needed.

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

Grade A Grade B List List

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

6 7 9 10 12 15

0.6 0.8 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.6

313 326 353 378 412 437

9 9 9 11 11 11

Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx24W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx30W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx36W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx42W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx48W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx60W

M-PMTB2624 M-PMTB2630 M-PMTB2636 M-PMTB2642 M-PMTB2648 M-PMTB2660

n n n n n n

26" 26" 26" 26" 26" 26"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

9 11 13 15 18 23

1.3 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.1 2.3

326 353 373 399 431 464

12 12 12 13 13 13

Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx24W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx30W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx36W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx42W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx48W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx60W

M-WMTB1324 M-WMTB1330 M-WMTB1336 M-WMTB1342 M-WMTB1348 M-WMTB1360

n n n n n n

13" 13" 13" 13" 13" 13"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

6 7 9 10 12 15

0.6 0.8 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.6

313 326 353 378 412 437

9 9 9 11 11 11

Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx24W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx30W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx36W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx42W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx48W Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard 26Hx60W

M-WMTB2624 M-WMTB2630 M-WMTB2636 M-WMTB2642 M-WMTB2648 M-WMTB2660

n n n n n n

26" 26" 26" 26" 26" 26"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

9 11 13 15 18 23

1.3 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.1 2.3

326 353 373 399 431 464

12 12 12 13 13 13

STORAGE

13" 13" 13" 13" 13" 13"

TABLES

n n n n n n

SURPASS

M-PMTB1324 M-PMTB1330 M-PMTB1336 M-PMTB1342 M-PMTB1348 M-PMTB1360

WORKSURFACES

Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx24W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx30W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx36W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx42W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx48W Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard 13Hx60W

PREFIX

Description

ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

115

SIN 711-1

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

TABLES

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREFIX

116

*Fabric, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE EMERGE PREFIX

Worksurfaces

∙∙ Finished with clean and crisp edges with 1⁄8" radius edge corners. ∙∙ Edgeband countertops are 15½" deep. ∙∙ Worksurfaces with edgeband and scallops will have T-mold on the scallop side of the worksurface.

INDEX

∙∙ Meets or exceeds applicable ANSI/BIFMA standards. ∙∙ Pre-drilled pilot holes for bracket attachment ensure precision alignment. ∙∙ Corner worksurface with directional laminate will have diagonal grain orientation.

SEATING

Special notes

ACCESSORIES

∙∙ Finished with impact resistant T-mold edges with 5⁄8 " radius edge corners. ∙∙ T-mold countertops are 12" deep.

Edgeband (E)

STORAGE

T-Mold (T)

PREPARE

Edge Options

SURPASS

∙∙ A complete line of worksurfaces is available for Panel and Wall-Track System applications. ∙∙ A wide variety of worksurface designs with a large selection of widths and lengths, T-mold and Edgeband edge treatment options, including countertops. ∙∙ Worksurface supports are ordered separately. ∙∙ Space-saving designs that were created to fit your “worker type" and “work style". ∙∙ Updated designs to accommodate flat screen technology. ∙∙ Scallop-shaped cutouts for easy cable management (1¼" x 6 5⁄8" inset). ∙∙ A wide variety of laminate choices in T-Mold and Edgeband, available on QuickShip. ∙∙ List price shown applies to laminates listed on the Maxon Core Laminate Finishes Card. ∙∙ Worksurface finishes coordinate with laminate panel finishes. ∙∙ 1.184" thick work tops have high pressure laminate top surface and the undersides have a moisture-resistant backing to prevent warping.

WORKSURFACES

Worksurfaces & Supports

Prices effective as of January 4, 2016. Information in this pricebook is accurate as of January 4, 2016. The pricebook is updated monthly. Go to www. MaxonEdge.com to find the most current pricing information in the electronic pricebook. Information is updated monthly in CAD and GIZA. Maxon recommends updating 20-20 Technologies software every month. *WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

117

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

Worksurface Support Kits ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are used to support worksurfaces in a panel environment. ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits MUST be ordered separately from worksurface components. ∙∙ To simplify this process, new hardware kits have been created for each worksurface type to take the guess work out of ordering mounting components. ∙∙ Full specification of all model options is required to complete order. ∙∙ For specialized configfurations or reconfiguration of current workstations. Refer to individual hardware components. ∙∙ Countertops include worksurface support kits. ∙∙ Please refer to the Worksurface Support Kits Chart below for a list of worksurface types and their corresponding hardware kits:

Worksurface Type

Description

Support Kit Model Number

M-UWR M-UWR

Rectangular Worksurface, ≤ 60" Wide Rectangular Worksurface, > 60" Wide

M-UWSKR2 M-UWSKR3

M-UWT

Transitional Worksurface

M-UWSKR2

M-UCS

Straight Front Corner Worksurface

M-UWSKC

M-UCR

Radius Front Corner Worksurface

M-UWSKC

M-UCST

Straight Front Transition Corner Worksurface

M-UWSKC

M-UCRT

Radius Front Transition Corner Worksurface

M-UWSKC

M-UWA

Arc Cutout Worksurface

M-UWSKR2

M-UCSE

Straight Front L-Return Worksurface

M-UWSKL

M-UCRE

Radius Front L-Return Worksurface

M-UWSKL

M-UPR

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface

M-UWSKP

M-UPB

"b" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface

M-UWSKP

M-UPD

"d" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface

M-UWSKP

M-UGPL

Grand Peninsula Worksurface (Left-Handed)

M-UWSKP

M-UGPR

Grand Peninsula Worksurface (Right-Handed)

M-UWSKP

M-UPAL

Curved Peninsula Worksurface (Left-Handed)

M-UWSKP

M-UPAR

Curved Peninsula Worksurface (Right-Handed)

M-UWSKP

STORAGE

Using Worksurface Support Kits vs A-la-Carte Worksurface Support Specification: Worksurface supports can either be ordered as a complete kit (see preceding Worksurface Support Kits Chart to determine correct Kit Model #), or can be specified as separate components to customize individual workstations.

M-UWR2472T (Rectangular Worksurface)

Worksurface Support Kits offer a complete solution for mounting worksurfaces to panel systems. Worksurface Support Kits provide a simple and fast solution for project specification. Refer to Worksurface Support Kits Chart for a quick and easy guide to specifying.

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

Example 1: Supporting with Worksurface Support Kits

(1) M-UWSKR3 (Rectangular Worksurface Support Kit)

118

Figure 1: To support a 24Dx72W rectangular worksurface in this configuration, an M-UWSKR3 rectangular worksurface support kit is all that is required.

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

Example 2: A-la-Carte Worksurface Support Specification

M-UWR2472T

Tailor worksurface supports to suit the specific requirements of your project.

(Rectangular Worksurface)

EMERGE

Allows you the opportunity to specify only the support components required when reconfiguring a project. Eliminates waste and allows you the flexibility to order only the support components necessary for your project.

PREFIX

Figure 2: If you are using a worksurface end panel to support one end of a 24Dx72W rectangular worksurface, the third cantilever support is not needed. Thus, only specify the two additional cantilevers needed to support the worksurface (and an M-DAB1 attaching bracket to connect to an adjoining surface).

(Bracket Support)

(2) M-C1R

(L-Return Worksurface)

(Right-Handed Cantilever Bracket)

(1) M-PMEP24L

WORKSURFACES

(1) M-CWB2 M-UCREL243672T

REFERENCE

Using Worksurface Support Kits vs A-la-Carte Worksurface Support Specification:

(Universal Worksurface End Panel Support)

SURPASS

(1) M-ESP24B-R

(Pedestal-to-Panel Spacer)

(24" D Ridgeline BBF Pedestal)

M-UCR2448T

(1) M-CWB2 (Bracket Support)

ACCESSORIES

(1) M-PEDSPR0-LH

STORAGE

(2) M-C1R (Right-Handed Cantilever Bracket)

PREPARE

Figure 3: If you are using a Stationary Pedestal (plus Pedestal-to-Panel Spacer) to support one end of a 24Dx36Wx72L L-Return worksurface, the third cantilever support is not needed. Thus, only specify the two additional cantilevers needed to support the worksurface, as well as an M-CWB2 bracket to support the rear corner (and an M-DAB1 attaching bracket to connect to an adjoining surface).

(Radius Corner Worksurface)

SEATING

Figure 4: If you are using a worksurface end panel to support one end of a 24Dx36W corner worksurface, the second cantilever support is not needed. Thus, only specify the one additional cantilever needed to support the worksurface, as well as an M-CWB2 bracket to support the rear corner (and an M-DAB1 attaching bracket to connect to an adjoining surface).

INDEX

(1) M-PMEP24L (Universal Worksurface End Panel Support)

(2) M-C1R (Right-Handed Cantilever Bracket)

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

119

SIN 711-1

Worksurfaces are 11⁄4" thick with particle board core and with top surfaces finished in high-pressure laminate (HPL). Bottom surfaces are covered with a backer sheet. Worksurfaces can be panel hung or used in freestanding applications. Modesty panels and appropriate supports are required to configure freestanding SURPASS® desks.

Worksurfaces • HPL laminate tops offer flat or T‑mold edge trim in twenty standard colors (customer specified) to match solid or woodgrain laminates and to complement patterned laminates. • Optional wider width primary worksurfaces are available for use with P  REFIX panel runs having a “T” or “S” connection — upcharge applies. • Scallops are standard in most rectangular worksurfaces for wire management. • HPL scallops match edge selection. • Rectangular worksurfaces over 36"W and corner coves have two scallops. 36"W and under rectangular worksurfaces and peninsulas have one scallop.

Flat Edge Profile

T-Mold Edge Profile

Supports Worksur­faces can be configured at 291⁄2"H with end‑panel supports and in‑line support panels, or at various heights on 1" increments using specific product configurations. Worksurface support options include: • • • • •

End-panel supports In‑line support legs Support columns Cantilever brackets Worksurface bracket kits

• • • • •

Flat brackets Freestanding pedestals Pedestal-to-panel attachment kit Desk-to-panel attachment kit Corner desk leg

21⁄4"

• Bridge and return kits • Modesty panels • Gussets

Support Guidelines • Unsupported panel runs greater than 72" require floor support for improved stability. • Worksurface bracket kit should be used to tie panels to worksurface for added stability. • A panel run without a return needs a floor support. • Unsupported HPL worksurface spans of 60"W-84"W require an external worksurface support channel. It is recommended for HPL spans 48"W-59"W. • Modesty panels and appropriate supports are required to configure freestanding SURPASS® desks. • Cantilevers are to be used on worksurface runs 72" or less.

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

120

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

Primary Worksurfaces

EMERGE

• Primary worksurfaces are available in 20", 24", and 30" depths up to 84"W. Worksurface spans greater than 72" require floor support. • Nominal worksurface width is equal to nominal panel width. • Worksurfaces 66"-72"W require a cantilever bracket for center support in panel mounted applications. Specify 20" cantilever on 20"D and 24"D, and 24" cantilever on 30"D worksurfaces. • Primary worksurfaces can be used with a modesty panel and appropriate supports to configure freestanding desk(s). Refer to Working With SURPASS®.

REFERENCE

Worksurfaces - High Pressure Laminate (HPL) with Edgeband or T-Mold Edge

Transitional Worksurfaces Bow-Front Worksurfaces

PREFIX

• Worksurfaces 66"-72"W require a 24" cantilever bracket for center support in panel mounted applications.

• Can be used with a modesty panel and appropriate supports to configure freestanding desk. Refer to SURPASS.

• HPL corner worksurfaces with woodgrain laminate have grain direction diagonal to adjacent worksurfaces. • Rear corner support bracket included. Worksurface bracket kit (order separately) required at junction where a panel is wall-mounted to a permanent wall and wall track stanchion is not positioned in the right-hand corner.

120° Corner Worksurfaces

L-Return Worksurfaces

PREPARE

• Worksurface bracket kit (order separately) required at junction where a panel is wall-mounted to a permanent wall and wall track stanchion is not positioned in the right-hand corner. All other support hardware is ordered separately. • Can be used with a modesty panel and appropriate supports to configure freestanding desk(s). Refer to SURPASS. • Worksurfaces 66"-72"W require a cantilever bracket for center support in panel mounted applications. Specify 20" cantilever on 24"D, and 24" cantilever on 30"D worksurfaces.

SURPASS

• Standard with one wire management grommet in corner location. • Worksurface bracket kit (order separately) required at junction where a panel is wall‑mounted to a permanent wall and wall track stanchion is not positioned in the right hand corner.

WORKSURFACES

Corner Worksurfaces

STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

121

EMERGE

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

Worksurface Supports End Supports and Bracket Kits

• Levelers provide 11⁄2" vertical adjustment. • Must be connected into panel slots for panel hung applications. • Straight worksurfaces adjacent to 120° connections must be supported by full end-panels. • 12"D end-panel models for use with D-shaped worksurfaces or curvilinear shaped worksurfaces in freestanding applications. • Panel mounted end‑panel supports are ordered for right‑ or left‑handed application.

• • • • •

Supports the junction of two worksurfaces. Non-handed for use at either end of worksurface. Provided with flat bracket. Worksurface in‑line support legs are used to support worksurfaces only in a shared position. Levelers provide 11⁄2" vertical adjustment.

Support Columns

• Used to support one end of curvilinear worksurfaces. • D‑shaped, B‑shaped and peninsula worksurfaces require sup­port columns (ordered separately). • Includes column, worksurface bracket kit, attaching hardware, and adjustable glides.

Cantilever Brackets — handed • • • •

• • • • • •

Cantilever brackets are left or right handed. No assembly required. They can be inserted into panel reveals in 1" vertical increments. One size is used for both 24" and 30"D worksurfaces. 20"D cantilever are for use with 20"D worksurfaces and to support 24"D worksurfaces 66"-72"W that require a cantilever bracket for center support in panel mounted applications. Both left and right brackets are required in shared applications. Use with runs 72" or less — avoid installation on only one side of a straight connection except to support corner worksurfaces. Floor support is required for runs greater than 72". Cantilevers can and should still be used in the middle of a worksurface run 72"W or less for proper support and to help prevent worksurface bowing. DO NOT position at the end of a panel run. DO NOT use to support worksurfaces from which a hanging pedestal is suspended or peninsula worksurface is attached. DO NOT use cantilever brackets to support worksurfaces supported with permanent-wall hanger kit.

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

Support Legs and Bracket Kit

122

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

Cantilevers

Example B: Cantilevers are allowed because

worksurface is not greater than 72"W.

worksurface run is not greater than 72"W.

PREFIX

Cantilever Brackets

Cantilever Brackets

30"D x 72"W Worksurface and 42"W Return Panels

SURPASS

Example C: Cantilevers are used at both ends of 84" run. Support leg is used at center of run.

Support Leg Cantilever Bracket

ACCESSORIES

Example D: Worksurface bracket kits are used at the end of runs where panel widths match worksurface depths. Cantilevers are used where worksurface depth does not match panel width and for center support on worksurface runs that greater than 72"W floor support is required.

Worksurface Bracket Kit Support Leg

Cantilever Brackets

INDEX

Worksurface Bracket Kit

SEATING

are not greater than 72"W. For worksurface runs

STORAGE

30"D Worksurface and 42"W Return Panels

PREPARE

Cantilever Bracket

WORKSURFACES

30"D x 48"W Worksurface and 42"W Return Panels

EMERGE

Example A: Cantilevers are allowed because

REFERENCE

Worksurface runs greater than 72" require floor support. Example: support pedestal or support leg. When the panel width matches the worksurface depth, worksurface brackets should be used at the end of runs. Cantilevers can and should still be used in the middle of a worksurface run 72" or less for proper support and to help prevent worksurface bowing. See examples below.

30"D Worksurfaces and 30"W Return Panels

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

123

SIN 711-1

Rectangular Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Rectangular Worksurface.

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. 72” worksurfaces require middle support Any worksurface spanning longer than 72” requires floor support. 60" surfaces and greater require additional center support.

D 24"

W 36”

Description

Rectangular Worksurface, T-Mold, 24" D

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

n

M-UWR3024T M-UWR3030T M-UWR3036T M-UWR3042T M-UWR3048T M-UWR3054T M-UWR3060T M-UWR3066T M-UWR3072T M-UWR3078T M-UWR3084T

n

n n n n n n n n n n

n n n n n n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72" 78" 84"

25 29 33 38 42 46 51 55 59 63 68

1.8 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.4 3.8 4.2 4.6 5.0 5.4 5.8

250 269 289 310 341 357 382 416 451 484 518

30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72" 78" 84"

29 35 39 45 51 55 61 66 72 77 82

2.2 2.7 3.2 3.7 4.2 4.7 5.2 5.7 6.2 6.6 7.1

310 332 350 373 402 421 442 480 520 559 598

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

Rectangular Worksurface, T-Mold, 30" D

Model M-UWR2424T M-UWR2430T M-UWR2436T M-UWR2442T M-UWR2448T M-UWR2454T M-UWR2460T M-UWR2466T M-UWR2472T M-UWR2478T M-UWR2484T

124

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

Rectangular Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Rectangular Worksurface.

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

EMERGE

Notes Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. 72” worksurfaces require middle support Any worksurface spanning longer than 72” requires floor support. 60" surfaces and greater require additional center support.

PREFIX WORKSURFACES

D 24"

W 36”

Rectangular Worksurface, Edgeband, 24" D

n

n n n n n n n n n

n n n n n n n n n n

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72" 78" 84"

28 33 37 41 46 50 55 59 63 67 71

1.8 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.4 3.8 4.2 4.6 5.0 5.4 5.8

299 314 336 351 382 399 418 456 494 533 570

30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72" 78" 84"

33 39 43 49 55 59 65 70 76 81 86

2.2 2.7 3.2 3.7 4.2 4.7 5.2 5.7 6.2 6.6 7.1

336 351 375 391 418 437 457 494 533 570 607

SEATING

M-UWR3024E M-UWR3030E M-UWR3036E M-UWR3042E M-UWR3048E M-UWR3054E M-UWR3060E M-UWR3066E M-UWR3072E M-UWR3078E M-UWR3084E

n

Wt.

ACCESSORIES

n

W

STORAGE

M-UWR2424E M-UWR2430E M-UWR2436E M-UWR2442E M-UWR2448E M-UWR2454E M-UWR2460E M-UWR2466E M-UWR2472E M-UWR2478E M-UWR2484E

D

PREPARE

Rectangular Worksurface, Edgeband, 30" D

Model

SURPASS

Description

INDEX

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

125

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

Extended Rectangular Worksurface: T-Mold Includes

Notes ∙∙ Worksurfaces are longer than standard rectangular worksurfaces & can be used on the back side of a 3-Way panel ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

connection. Also can be used with Adjustable Wall Starters to minimize gap in an L-shaped configuration. Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. 72” worksurfaces require middle support Any worksurface spanning longer than 72” requires floor support. 60" surfaces and greater require additional center support.

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Rectangular Worksurface.

D 24"

SURPASS

W 45”

Description

PREFIX, Extended Primary Worksurface, T-Mold, 24"D

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FTWE2426T

n

24"

26"

29.0

2.1

301

M-FTWE2432T

n

24"

32"

33.0

2.5

322

M-FTWE2438T

n

24"

38"

37.0

2.9

340

M-FTWE2444T

n

24"

44"

42.0

3.4

362

M-FTWE2450T

n

24"

50"

46.0

3.8

391

M-FTWE2456T

n

24"

56"

49.0

4.2

409

M-FTWE2462T

n

24"

62"

55.0

4.6

429

M-FTWE2468T

n

24"

68"

59.0

5.1

453

M-FTWE2474T

n

24"

74"

65.0

5.5

478

M-FTWE2480T

n

24"

80"

67.0

5.9

504

M-PXWR2426T

n

24"

26"

26

2.2

310

M-PXWR2432T

n

24"

32"

30

2.6

332

M-PXWR2438T

n

24"

38"

34

3.0

350

M-PXWR2444T

n

24"

44"

39

3.4

373

M-PXWR2450T

n

24"

50"

43

3.8

402

M-PXWR2456T

n

24"

56"

47

4.2

421

M-PXWR2462T

n

24"

62"

52

4.6

442

M-PXWR2468T

n

24"

68"

56

5.0

466

M-PXWR2474T M-PXWR2480T

n

24"

74"

62

5.4

492

n

24"

80"

64

5.8

519

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

EMERGE, Extended Primary Worksurface, T-Mold, 24"D

Model

126

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

Extended Rectangular Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Rectangular Worksurface.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Worksurfaces are longer than standard rectangular worksurfaces & can be used on the back side of a 3-Way panel

connection. Also can be used with Adjustable Wall Starters to minimize gap in an L-shaped configuration. Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. 72” worksurfaces require middle support Any worksurface spanning longer than 72” requires floor support. 60" surfaces and greater require additional center support.

PREFIX

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

WORKSURFACES

D 24"

W 45”

EMERGE, Extended Primary Worksurface, Edgeband, 24"D

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

26"

29.0

2.1

341

24"

32"

33.0

2.5

364

M-FTWE2438E

n

24"

38"

37.0

2.9

380

M-FTWE2444E

n

24"

44"

42.0

3.4

409

M-FTWE2450E

n

24"

50"

46.0

3.8

425

M-FTWE2456E

n

24"

56"

49.0

4.2

444

M-FTWE2462E

n

24"

62"

55.0

4.6

464

M-FTWE2468E

n

24"

68"

59.0

5.1

486

M-FTWE2474E

n

24"

74"

65.0

5.5

510

M-FTWE2480E

n

24"

80"

67.0

5.9

535

M-PXWR2426E

n

24"

26"

29

2.2

351

M-PXWR2432E

n

24"

32"

33

2.6

375

M-PXWR2438E

n

24"

38"

37

3.0

391

M-PXWR2444E

n

24"

44"

42

3.4

421

M-PXWR2450E

n

24"

50"

46

3.8

437

M-PXWR2456E

n

24"

56"

49

4.2

457

M-PXWR2462E

n

24"

62"

55

4.6

477

M-PXWR2468E

n

24"

68"

59

5.0

500

M-PXWR2474E

n

24"

74"

65

5.4

525

M-PXWR2480E

n

24"

80"

67

5.8

550

SEATING

24"

n

ACCESSORIES

n

STORAGE

M-FTWE2426E M-FTWE2432E

PREPARE

PREFIX, Extended Primary Worksurface, Edgeband, 24"D

Model

SURPASS

Description

INDEX

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

127

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

Transitional Worksurface: T-Mold Includes

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Transition from 24"D to 30"D Worksurfaces. Grain Direction runs along width (directional laminates only). Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. 60" surfaces and greater require additional center support.

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Transitional Worksurface.

W 36"

D L 24"

D R 30"

Description

Transitional Worksurface, T-Mold, 24"L / 30"R Depth

Transitional Worksurface, T-Mold, 30"L / 24"R Depth

Model M-UWT243024T M-UWT243030T M-UWT243036T M-UWT243042T M-UWT243048T M-UWT243060T

n

M-UWT302424T M-UWT302430T M-UWT302436T M-UWT302442T M-UWT302448T M-UWT302460T

n

n n n n n

n n n n n

Depth L

Depth R

User Edge

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

9 3⁄4" 15 3⁄4" 17 3⁄4" 23 3⁄4" 25 3⁄4" 37 3⁄4"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

28 34 38 44 50 60

2.2 2.7 3.2 3.7 4.2 5.2

340 361 382 406 433 482

30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

9 3⁄4" 15 3⁄4" 17 3⁄4" 23 3⁄4" 25 3⁄4" 37 3⁄4"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

28 34 38 44 50 60

2.2 2.7 3.2 3.7 4.2 5.2

340 361 382 406 433 482

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

UE

128

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

Transitional Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Transitional Worksurface.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Transition from 24"D to 30"D Worksurfaces. Grain Direction runs along width (directional laminates only). Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. 60" surfaces and greater require additional center support.

PREFIX

W 36"

WORKSURFACES

D L 24"

D R 30"

UE

Transitional Worksurface, Edgeband, 24"L / 30"R

n

M-UWT302424E M-UWT302430E M-UWT302436E M-UWT302442E M-UWT302448E M-UWT302460E

n

n n n n n

n n n n n

Depth R

User Edge

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

9 3⁄4" 15 3⁄4" 17 3⁄4" 23 3⁄4" 25 3⁄4" 37 3⁄4"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

31 38 42 47 54 64

2.2 2.7 3.2 3.7 4.2 5.2

375 397 418 444 477 523

30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

9 3⁄4" 15 3⁄4" 17 3⁄4" 23 3⁄4" 25 3⁄4" 37 3⁄4"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 60"

31 38 42 47 54 64

2.2 2.7 3.2 3.7 4.2 5.2

375 397 418 444 477 523

STORAGE

M-UWT243024E M-UWT243030E M-UWT243036E M-UWT243042E M-UWT243048E M-UWT243060E

Depth L

PREPARE

Transitional Worksurface, Edgeband, 30"L / 24"R

Model

SURPASS

Description

ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

129

SIN 711-1

Arc Cutout Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Arc Cutout Worksurface.

Notes ∙∙ Grain Direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Arc Cutout is 4" deep at the center. ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

Model

Description

Arc Cutout Worksurface, T-Mold, 24" D

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

M-UWA2436T M-UWA2442T M-UWA2448T

n n n

Depth

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

36" 42" 48"

33 38 42

2.6 3.0 3.4

337 359 393

W 48"

W 48"

D 24"

PREPARE

SURPASS

D 24"

Arc Cutout Worksurface: Edgeband Includes

Notes ∙∙ Grain Direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Arc Cutout is 4" deep at the center. ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

Description

Arc Cutout Worksurface, Edgeband, 24" D

Model M-UWA2436E M-UWA2442E M-UWA2448E

n n n

Depth

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

36" 42" 48"

37 41 46

2.6 3.0 3.4

384 408 436

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

∙∙ Arc Cutout Worksurface.

130

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

Straight-Front Corner Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Straight-Front Corner Worksurface.

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Grain direction runs diagonally along worksurface (directional laminates only). Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. M-UCS24XXT: 36" and 42" W have straight diagonal user edge; 48" W (shown) has diagonal user edge with wings M-UCS30XXT: All sizes have straight diagonal user edge (no wings)

Straight Front Corner Worksurface, T-Mold, 24" Depth

n

M-UCS3042T M-UCS3048T

n

n n

n

User Edge

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

17" 25" 22"

36" 42" 48"

42 50 58

3.8 5.0 6.5

504 579 641

30" 30"

17" 25"

42" 48"

55 66

5.0 6.5

652 676

SURPASS

W 36" W 36"

PREPARE

D 24"

D 24" UE

UE

STORAGE

Straight-Front Corner Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Straight-Front Corner Worksurface.

ACCESSORIES

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Grain direction runs diagonally along worksurface (directional laminates only). Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. M-UCS24XXE: 36" and 42" W have straight diagonal user edge; 48" W (shown) has diagonal user edge with wings M-UCS30XXE: All sizes have straight diagonal user edge (no wings)

Straight Front, Edgeband, 24" Depth

M-UCS2436E M-UCS2442E M-UCS2448E

n

M-UCS3042E M-UCS3048E

n

n n

n

Depth

User Edge

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

17" 25" 22"

36" 42" 48"

46 54 62

3.8 5.0 6.5

638 659 870

30" 30"

17" 25"

42" 48"

59 70

5.0 6.5

851 923

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

Straight Front, Edgeband, 30" Depth

Model

SEATING

Description

WORKSURFACES

Straight Front Corner Worksurface, T-Mold, 30" Depth

M-UCS2436T M-UCS2442T M-UCS2448T

Depth

PREFIX

Model

Description

EMERGE

Notes

131

SIN 711-1

Radius-Front Corner Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Radius-Front Corner Worksurface.

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs diagonally along worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

Model

Description

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

Radius Front Corner Worksurface, T-Mold, 24" D

WORKSURFACES

Radius Front Corner Worksurface, T-Mold, 30" D

M-UCR2436T M-UCR2442T M-UCR2448T

n

M-UCR3042T M-UCR3048T

n

Depth

Radius

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

11" 17" 17"

36" 42" 48"

42 50 58

3.8 5.0 6.5

504 579 641

30" 30"

11" 17"

42" 48"

55 66

5.0 6.5

652 676

n n

n

W 36"

SURPASS

W 36"

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

D 24"

132

D 24" Radius

Radius

Radius-Front Corner Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Radius-Front Corner Worksurface.

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs diagonally along worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

Description

Radius Front Corner Worksurface, Edgeband, 24" D

Radius Front Corner Worksurface, Edgeband, 30" D

Model M-UCR2436E M-UCR2442E M-UCR2448E

n

M-UCR3042E M-UCR3048E

n

n n

n

Depth

Radius

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

11" 17" 17"

36" 42" 48"

46 54 62

3.8 5.0 6.5

638 659 870

30" 30"

11" 17"

42" 48"

59 70

5.0 6.5

851 923

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

Worksurfaces Straight-Front, Transition Corner Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Straight-Front Transition Corner Worksurface.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs diagonally along worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

Straight-Front Transition Corner Worksurface, T-Mold, 24"L / 30"R

M-UCST302436T M-UCST302442T M-UCST302448T

n

n n

n n

Depth R

User Edge

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

30" 30" 30"

13" 211⁄2" 30"

36" 42" 48"

45 53 63

3.8 5.0 6.5

575 652 676

30" 30" 30"

24" 24" 24"

13" 211⁄2" 30"

36" 42" 48"

45 53 63

3.8 5.0 6.5

575 652 676

W 36"

DR 30"

DL 24"

UE

PREPARE

DR 30"

DL 24"

SURPASS

W 36"

UE

STORAGE

Straight-Front, Transition Corner Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Straight-Front Transition Corner Worksurface.

ACCESSORIES

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs diagonally along worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

Straight-Front Transition Corner Worksurface, Edgeband, 24"L / 30"R

M-UCST243036E M-UCST243042E M-UCST243048E

n

M-UCST302436E M-UCST302442E M-UCST302448E

n

n n

n n

Depth L

Depth R

User Edge

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

30" 30" 30"

13" 211⁄2" 30"

36" 42" 48"

49 57 67

3.8 5.0 6.5

812 832 855

30" 30" 30"

24" 24" 24"

13" 211⁄2" 30"

36" 42" 48"

49 57 67

3.8 5.0 6.5

812 832 855

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

Straight-Front Transition Corner WorksurfaceEdgeband, 30"L / 24"R

Model

SEATING

Description

WORKSURFACES

Straight-Front Transition Corner Worksurface, Edgeband, 30"L / 24"R

M-UCST243036T M-UCST243042T M-UCST243048T

n

Depth L

PREFIX

Model

Description

133

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

Radius-Front, Transition Corner Worksurface: T-Mold Includes

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs diagonally along worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

Model

Description

Radius-Front Transition Corner, T-Mold, 24"L / 30"R

Radius-Front Transition Corner, T-Mold, 30"L / 24"R

DL 24"

PREPARE STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

134

M-UCRT243036T M-UCRT243042T M-UCRT243048T

n

M-UCRT302436T M-UCRT302442T M-UCRT302448T

n

n n

n n

Depth L

Depth R

Radius

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

30" 30" 30"

5" 11" 17"

36" 42" 48"

45 53 63

3.8 5.0 6.5

575 652 676

30" 30" 30"

24" 24" 24"

5" 11" 17"

36" 42" 48"

45 53 63

3.8 5.0 6.5

575 652 676

W 36"

W 36"

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Radius-Front Transition Corner Worksurface.

DL 24"

DR 30"

DR 30"

Raduis

Raduis

Radius-Front, Transition Corner Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Radius-Front Transition Corner Worksurface.

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs diagonally along worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

Description

Radius-Front Transition Corner, Edgeband, 24"L / 30"R

Radius-Front Transition Corner, Edgeband, 30"L / 24"R

Model M-UCRT243036E M-UCRT243042E M-UCRT243048E

n

M-UCRT302436E M-UCRT302442E M-UCRT302448E

n

n n

n n

Depth L

Depth R

Radius

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

30" 30" 30"

5" 11" 17"

36" 42" 48"

49 57 67

3.8 5.0 6.5

812 832 855

30" 30" 30"

24" 24" 24"

5" 11" 17"

36" 42" 48"

49 57 67

3.8 5.0 6.5

812 832 855

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

Straight-Front L-Return Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Straight-Front L-Return Worksurface.

Notes EMERGE

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Grain direction runs along length of worksurface (directional laminates only). Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. 72” worksurfaces require middle support Any worksurface spanning longer than 72” requires floor support. 60" surfaces and greater require additional center support. L 60"

PREFIX

D 24"

WORKSURFACES

W 36" UE Left-Handed Shown D 24" Model

n

Straight-Front, L-Return Worksurface, T-Mold, Left-Handed 30"D, 48"W

M-UCSEL304860T M-UCSEL304866T M-UCSEL304872T

n

Straight-Front, L-Return Worksurface, T-Mold, Right-Handed 24"D, 36"W

M-UCSER243660T M-UCSER243666T M-UCSER243672T

n

Straight-Front, L-Return Worksurface, T-Mold, Right-Handed 24"D, 48"W

M-UCSER244860T M-UCSER244866T M-UCSER244872T

n

Straight-Front, L-Return Worksurface, T-Mold, Right-Handed 30"D, 48"W

M-UCSER304860T M-UCSER304866T M-UCSER304872T

n

n n

n n

n n

n n

n n

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

17" 17" 17"

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

55 61 68

6.0 6.8 7.1

711 727 747

24" 24" 24"

22" 22" 22"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

71 77 84

8.0 8.7 9.5

747 761 783

30" 30" 30"

25" 25" 25"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

79 85 92

8.0 8.7 9.5

761 783 798

24" 24" 24"

17" 17" 17"

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

55 61 68

6.0 6.8 7.1

711 727 747

24" 24" 24"

22" 22" 22"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

71 77 84

8.0 8.7 9.5

747 761 783

30" 30" 30"

25" 25" 25"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

79 85 92

8.0 8.7 9.5

761 783 798

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

M-UCSEL244860T M-UCSEL244866T M-UCSEL244872T

n

Wt.

SEATING

Straight-Front, L-Return Worksurface, T-Mold, Left-Handed 24"D, 48"W

n

L

ACCESSORIES

n

W

STORAGE

M-UCSEL243660T M-UCSEL243666T M-UCSEL243672T

User Edge

PREPARE

Straight-Front, L-Return Worksurface, T-Mold, Left-Handed 24"D, 36"W

D

SURPASS

Description

135

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

Straight-Front L-Return Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Straight-Front L-Return Worksurface.

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Grain direction runs along length of worksurface (directional laminates only). Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. 72” worksurfaces require middle support Any worksurface spanning longer than 72” requires floor support. 60" surfaces and greater require additional center support. L 60"

W 36" UE Left-Handed Shown D 24" Description

Model

M-UCSEL243660E Straight-Front, L-Return Worksurface, M-UCSEL243666E Edgeband, Left-Handed 24"D, 36"W M-UCSEL243672E

n

M-UCSEL244860E M-UCSEL244866E M-UCSEL244872E

n

M-UCSEL304860E Straight-Front, L-Return Worksurface, M-UCSEL304866E Edgeband, Left-Handed 30"D, 48"W M-UCSEL304872E

n

M-UCSER243660E Straight-Front, L-Return Worksurface, M-UCSER243666E Edgeband, Right-Handed 24"D, 36"W M-UCSER243672E

n

M-UCSER244860E Straight-Front, L-Return Worksurface, M-UCSER244866E Edgeband, Right-Handed 24"D, 48"W M-UCSER244872E

n

M-UCSER304860E Straight-Front, L-Return Worksurface, M-UCSER304866E Edgeband, Right-Handed 30"D, 48"W M-UCSER304872E

n

Straight-Front, L-Return Worksurface, Edgeband, Left-Handed 24"D, 48"W

n n

n n

n n

n n

n n

n n

D

User Edge

W

L

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

17" 17" 17"

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

59 65 72

6.0 6.8 7.1

777 794 818

24" 24" 24"

22" 22" 22"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

75 81 88

8.0 8.7 9.5

818 833 853

30" 30" 30"

25" 25" 25"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

83 89 96

8.0 8.7 9.5

833 855 870

24" 24" 24"

17" 17" 17"

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

59 65 72

6.0 6.8 7.1

777 794 818

24" 24" 24"

22" 22" 22"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

75 81 88

8.0 8.7 9.5

818 833 853

30" 30" 30"

25" 25" 25"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

83 89 96

8.0 8.7 9.5

833 855 870

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

D 24"

136

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

Radius-Front L-Return Worksurface - T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Radius-Front L-Return Worksurface.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

PREFIX

Grain direction runs along length of worksurface (directional laminates only). Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. 72” worksurfaces require middle support Any worksurface spanning longer than 72” requires floor support. 60" surfaces and greater require additional center support. L 60"

D 24"

WORKSURFACES

W 36" Radius Left-Handed Shown

Description

Model

n

Radius-Front, L-Return Worksurface, T-Mold, Left-Handed 30"D, 48"W

M-UCREL304860T M-UCREL304866T M-UCREL304872T

n

Radius-Front, L-Return Worksurface, T-Mold, Right-Handed 24"D, 36"W

M-UCRER243660T M-UCRER243666T M-UCRER243672T

n

Radius-Front, L-Return Worksurface, T-Mold, Right-Handed 24"D, 48"W

M-UCRER244860T M-UCRER244866T M-UCRER244872T

n

Radius-Front, L-Return Worksurface, T-Mold, Right-Handed 30"D, 48"W

M-UCRER304860T M-UCRER304866T M-UCRER304872T

n

n n

n n

n n

n n

n n

L

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

11" 11" 11"

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

55 61 68

6.0 6.8 7.1

711 727 747

24" 24" 24"

17" 17" 17"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

71 77 84

8.0 8.7 9.5

747 761 783

30" 30" 30"

17" 17" 17"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

79 85 92

8.0 8.7 9.5

761 783 798

24" 24" 24"

11" 11" 11"

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

55 61 68

6.0 6.8 7.1

711 727 747

24" 24" 24"

17" 17" 17"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

71 77 84

8.0 8.7 9.5

747 761 783

30" 30" 30"

17" 17" 17"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

79 85 92

8.0 8.7 9.5

761 783 798

SEATING

M-UCREL244860T M-UCREL244866T M-UCREL244872T

n

W

ACCESSORIES

Radius-Front, L-Return Worksurface, T-Mold, Left-Handed 24"D, 48"W

n

Radius

STORAGE

M-UCREL243660T M-UCREL243666T M-UCREL243672T

D

PREPARE

Radius-Front, L-Return Worksurface, T-Mold, Left-Handed 24"D, 36"W

n

SURPASS

D 24"

INDEX

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

137

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

Radius-Front L-Return Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Radius-Front L-Return Worksurface.

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Grain direction runs along length of worksurface (directional laminates only). Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. 72” worksurfaces require middle support Any worksurface spanning longer than 72” requires floor support. 60" surfaces and greater require additional center support. L 60"

D 24"

W 36" Radius

D 24" Description

Model

Radius-Front, L-Return Worksurface, Edgeband, Left-Handed 24"D, 36"W

M-UCREL243660E M-UCREL243666E M-UCREL243672E

n

Radius-Front, L-Return Worksurface, Edgeband, Left-Handed 24"D, 48"W

M-UCREL244860E M-UCREL244866E M-UCREL244872E

n

Radius-Front, L-Return Worksurface, Edgeband, Left-Handed 30"D, 48"W

M-UCREL304860E M-UCREL304866E M-UCREL304872E

n

Radius-Front, L-Return Worksurface, Edgeband, Right-Handed 24"D, 36"W

M-UCRER243660E M-UCRER243666E M-UCRER243672E

n

Radius-Front, L-Return Worksurface, Edgeband, Right-Handed 24"D, 48"W

M-UCRER244860E M-UCRER244866E M-UCRER244872E

n

Radius-Front, L-Return Worksurface, Edgeband, Right-Handed 30"D, 48"W

M-UCRER304860E M-UCRER304866E M-UCRER304872E

n

n n

n n

n n

n n

n n

n n

D

Radius

W

L

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

11" 11" 11"

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

59 65 72

6.0 6.8 7.1

777 794 818

24" 24" 24"

17" 17" 17"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

75 81 88

8.0 8.7 9.5

818 833 853

30" 30" 30"

17" 17" 17"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

83 89 96

8.0 8.7 9.5

833 855 870

24" 24" 24"

11" 11" 11"

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

59 65 72

6.0 6.8 7.1

777 794 818

24" 24" 24"

17" 17" 17"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

75 81 88

8.0 8.7 9.5

818 833 853

30" 30" 30"

17" 17" 17"

48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72"

83 89 96

8.0 8.7 9.5

833 855 870

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

Left-Handed Shown

138

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Radius End Peninsula Worksurface.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

PREFIX

W 48"

Description

n

M-UPR3648T M-UPR3654T M-UPR3660T M-UPR3666T M-UPR3672T

n

n n n

n n n n

n n n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

54 58 62 66 70

4.2 4.7 5.2 5.7 6.2

407 426 444 461 482

30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

62 66 70 74 78

4.7 5.2 5.7 6.2 7.3

463 485 507 525 548

36" 36" 36" 36" 36"

48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

66 70 74 78 82

5.3 5.9 6.5 7.1 7.7

499 585 605 626 649

ACCESSORIES

M-UPR3048T M-UPR3054T M-UPR3060T M-UPR3066T M-UPR3072T

n

D 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

STORAGE

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, 36" D

n

PREPARE

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, 30" D

Model M-UPR2448T M-UPR2454T M-UPR2460T M-UPR2466T M-UPR2472T

SURPASS

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, 24" D

WORKSURFACES

D 24"

SEATING INDEX

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

139

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband Includes

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

W 48"

D 24"

Description

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, 24" D

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, 30" D

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, 36" D

Model M-UPR2448E M-UPR2454E M-UPR2460E M-UPR2466E M-UPR2472E

n

M-UPR3048E M-UPR3054E M-UPR3060E M-UPR3066E M-UPR3072E

n

M-UPR3648E M-UPR3654E M-UPR3660E M-UPR3666E M-UPR3672E

n

n n n n

n n n n

n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

61 65 69 73 77

4.2 4.7 5.2 5.7 6.2

606 632 657 682 730

30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

71 75 78 81 84

4.7 5.2 5.7 6.2 7.3

657 682 708 730 756

36" 36" 36" 36" 36"

48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

74 78 83 87 90

5.3 5.9 6.5 7.1 7.7

708 730 756 783 803

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Radius End Peninsula Worksurface.

140

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

"b" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ "b" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

Model

Description

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-UPB3072T

n

30"

72"

90

8.4

796

M-UPB3672T

n

36"

72"

95

9.5

829

SURPASS

42" diameter

42" diameter

D 30"

D 30"

PREPARE

W 72"

W 72"

STORAGE

"b" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ "b" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface.

ACCESSORIES

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

"b" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, 30" D

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-UPB3072E

n

30"

72"

95

8.4

1067

M-UPB3672E

n

36"

72"

100

9.5

1113

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

"b" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, 36" D

Model

SEATING

Description

WORKSURFACES

"b" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, 36" D

W

PREFIX

"b" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, 30" D

D

141

Includes ∙∙ "d" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface.

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

"d" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, 30" D

WORKSURFACES SURPASS

Model

Description

"d" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, 36" D

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-UPD3072T

n

30"

72"

90

8.4

796

M-UPD3672T

n

36"

72"

95

9.5

829

D 30"

D 30"

42" diameter

42" diameter

PREPARE STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

142

SIN 711-1

"d" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface: T-Mold

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

W 72"

W 72"

"d" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ "d" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface.

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

Description

"d" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, 30" D

"d" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, 36" D

Model

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-UPD3072E

n

30"

72"

95

8.4

1067

M-UPD3672E

n

36"

72"

100

9.5

1113

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

Grand Peninsula Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Grand Peninsula Worksurface.

Notes EMERGE

∙∙ Grain direction runs along length of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

Model

Grand Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, Left-Handed

W

L

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-UGPL244872T

n

24"

48"

72"

90

9.5

824

M-UGPR244872T

n

24"

48"

72"

90

9.5

824

D 24"

D 24"

right-hand shown

right-hand shown

PREPARE

L 72"

L 72"

STORAGE

Grand Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Grand Peninsula Worksurface.

ACCESSORIES

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along length of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

Grand Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, Left-Handed

D

W

L

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-UGPL244872E

n

24"

48"

72"

95

9.5

1113

M-UGPR244872E

n

24"

48"

72"

95

9.5

1113

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

Grand Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, Right-Handed

Model

SEATING

Description

SURPASS

W 48"

W 48"

WORKSURFACES

Grand Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, Right-Handed

D

PREFIX

Description

143

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

Curved Peninsula Worksurface: T-Mold Includes

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along length of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Curved Peninsula Worksurface.

Description

Model

Curved Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, Left-Handed

M-UPAL243660T M-UPAL243666T M-UPAL243672T

n

Curved Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, Right-Handed

M-UPAR243660T M-UPAR243666T M-UPAR243672T

n

n n

n n

D

W

L

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

84 88 92

8.0 8.7 9.5

797 899 963

24" 24" 24"

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

84 88 92

8.0 8.7 9.5

797 899 963

D 24"

D 24"

SURPASS

right-hand shown

right-hand shown

PREPARE

W 36"

W 36"

8"

8"

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

L 72"

144

L 72"

Curved Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Curved Peninsula Worksurface.

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along length of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

Description

Model

Curved Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, Left-Handed

M-UPAL243660E M-UPAL243666E M-UPAL243672E

n

Curved Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, Right-Handed

M-UPAR243660E M-UPAR243666E M-UPAR243672E

n

n n

n n

D

W

L

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

88 92 96

8.0 8.7 9.5

1011 1067 1113

24" 24" 24"

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

88 92 96

8.0 8.7 9.5

1011 1067 1113

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

Half Round Extension Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Half Round Extension Worksurface.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ For use at the end of a panel run for fixed or mobile applications. ∙∙ Grain direction runs perpendicular to back edge of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

PREFIX Half-Round Extension, T-Mold

EMERGE Half-Round Extension, T-Mold

n n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

26" 30" 36" 26" 30" 36"

47 56 64 47 56 64

4.7 4.7 5.3 4.7 4.7 5.3

422 469 512 410 456 498

D 24"

W 26"

SURPASS

D 24"

WORKSURFACES

M-PXHRE2426T M-PXHRE2430T M-PXHRE2436T M-FTHRE2426T M-FTHRE2430T M-FTHRE2436T

PREFIX

Model

Description

W 26"

PREPARE STORAGE

Half Round Extension Worksurface: Edgeband Includes

ACCESSORIES

∙∙ Half Round Extension Worksurface.

Notes ∙∙ For use at the end of a panel run for fixed or mobile applications. ∙∙ Grain direction runs perpendicular to back edge of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

PREFIX Half-Round Extension, Edgeband

M-PXHRE2426E M-PXHRE2430E M-PXHRE2436E M-FTHRE2426E M-FTHRE2430E M-FTHRE2436E

n n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

26" 32" 38" 26" 32" 38"

47 56 64 47 56 64

4.7 4.7 5.3 4.7 4.7 5.3

520 571 620 505 555 603

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

EMERGE Half-Round Extension, Edgeband

Model

SEATING

Description

145

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

PREFIX Radius Connecting Worksurface Top: T-Mold Includes Notes ∙∙ Grain direction is diagonal (45º) (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

n

D

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 30"

25 31

1.8 2.7

375 431

ne pa

pa

ne

ls

Prefix Radius Connecting Top, T-Mold

n

24"D

SURPASS PREPARE STORAGE

Model M-PXCR24T M-PXCR30T

outside station

24"D

radius connecting top

outside station

radius connecting top

PREFIX Radius Connecting Worksurface Top: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Radius Connecting Top.

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction is diagonal (45º) (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. Description

Model

Prefix Radius Connecting Top, Edgeband

M-PXCR24E M-PXCR30E

n n

D

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 30"

25 31

1.8 2.7

433 498

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

Description

ls

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Radius Connecting Top.

146

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

PREFIX Triangular Connecting Worksurface Top: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Triangular Connecting Top.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction is diagonal (45º) (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

Prefix Triangular Connecting Top, T-Mold

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

24 30

1.8 2.7

375 431

pa

pa

ne

ne

ls

n

D 24" 30"

WORKSURFACES

ls

Model M-PXCS24T M-PXCS30T

24"D

24"D

triangular connecting top

SURPASS

outside station

triangular connecting top

outside station

PREFIX

Description

PREPARE

PREFIX Triangular Connecting Worksurface Top: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Triangular Connecting Top.

Notes STORAGE

∙∙ Grain direction is diagonal (45º) (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately.

Model

Prefix Triangular Connecting Top, Edgeband

M-PXCS24E M-PXCS30E

n n

D

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 30"

24 30

1.8 2.7

433 498

ACCESSORIES

Description

SEATING INDEX

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

147

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

120 Degree Corner Worksurface - Edgeband Includes Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Standard with one wire management grommet in corner location. ∙∙ Supports sold separately

Universal 120 Degree Corner

Description

Unv. WS 120deg Crnr 24Dx30W Eband Unv. WS 120deg Crnr 24Dx36W Eband Unv. WS 120deg Crnr 24Dx42W Eband Unv. WS 120deg Crnr 24Dx48W Eband

Model

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-UWYC2430E M-UWYC2436E M-UWYC2442E M-UWYC2448E

24" 24" 24" 24"

30" 36" 42" 48"

72.0 77.0 82.0 87.0

5.1 7.0 8.5 10.6

550 600 750 850

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Left-handed Rear Support Bracket

148

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

∙∙ Countertops provide a functional transactional worksurface, while providing a visual cue by physically defining

a user and guest space. ∙∙ Maxon Countertops are offered in both of our Worksurface options: T-mold and Edgeband.

∙∙ Edgeband Countertops are 15½" deep and offer a crisp, clean look. Edgeband is also available in coordinating woodgrain

options.

EMERGE

∙∙ T-Mold Countertops are 12" deep, offer an impact resistant edge treatment, and have radius edge corners.

REFERENCE

Countertops

PREFIX

Corner (T-mold)

Corner (Edgeband)

Straight

∙∙ By adding the ability to unlink countertop-to-panel widths, Countertop specification methodology allows for virtually

unlimited panel configuration options.

SURPASS

Special Notes on Maxon countertops

WORKSURFACES

2-way 120° Corner

∙∙ Single countertops can now span multiple panels.

PREPARE

∙∙ Multiple countertops can span a single panel. ∙∙ Transitional Corner Countertops are no longer necessary. ∙∙ Corner Countertops do not have to match panel widths. ∙∙ Countertop model numbers refer to the length of the actual panel space used. Refer to examples below.

STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING

∙∙ When ordering straight panels, order enough Countertops in any combination to cover the panel run.

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

∙∙ When ordering a Corner Countertop, order a corner size to fit the return panel. Add a Straight Countertop to equal the length of a panel run.

149

EMERGE

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

EMERGE Countertop with Support - Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Straight Countertop ∙∙ Top Cap ∙∙ Countertop Brackets

Notes

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

∙∙ Grain direction runs along width of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Edgeband Countertops are 15"D.

Description Straight Countertop 15Dx24W WITH SUPPORT Straight Countertop 15Dx30W WITH SUPPORT Straight Countertop 15Dx36W WITH SUPPORT Straight Countertop 15Dx42W WITH SUPPORT Straight Countertop 15Dx48W WITH SUPPORT Straight Countertop 15Dx54W WITH SUPPORT Straight Countertop 15Dx60W WITH SUPPORT Straight Countertop 15Dx66W WITH SUPPORT Straight Countertop 15Dx72W WITH SUPPORT

Model

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FTCT1524E M-FTCT1530E M-FTCT1536E M-FTCT1542E M-FTCT1548E M-FTCT1554E M-FTCT1560E M-FTCT1566E M-FTCT1572E

15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

15.0 19.0 21.0 25.0 29.0 33.0 37.0 41.0 45.0

1.2 1.4 1.7 1.9 2.1 2.7 2.7 3.2 3.2

514 543 572 601 630 658 687 716 745

Includes ∙∙ 90 Degree Corner Countertop ∙∙ Top Caps ∙∙ Countertop Brackets

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Edgeband Countertops are 15"D.

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

EMERGE 90 Degree Corner Countertop with Support - Edgeband

150

Description Corner Countertop 15Dx24W WITH SUPPORT Corner Countertop 15Dx30W WITH SUPPORT Corner Countertop 15Dx36W WITH SUPPORT

Model

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FTCCT152424E M-FTCCT153030E M-FTCCT153636E

15" 15" 15"

24" 30" 36"

34.0 39.0 45.0

2.8 4.0 5.1

885 987 1090

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

EMERGE 120 Degree Corner Countertop with Support - Edgeband Includes

EMERGE

∙∙ 120 Degree Corner Countertop ∙∙ Top Caps ∙∙ Countertop Brackets

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Edgeband Countertops are 15"D.

PREFIX

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-FTVCT153030E M-FTVCT153636E M-FTVCT154242E M-FTVCT154848E

15" 15" 15" 15"

30" 36" 42" 48"

35.0 40.0 46.0 53.0

5.4 7.1 8.4 10.3

1018 1193 1368 1553

SURPASS

120 Corner Countertop 15Dx30W WITH SUPPORT 120 Corner Countertop 15Dx36W WITH SUPPORT 120 Corner Countertop 15Dx42W WITH SUPPORT 120 Corner Countertop 15Dx48W WITH SUPPORT

Model

WORKSURFACES

Description

PREPARE

PREFIX 120 Degree Corner Countertop with Support - T-Mold Includes ∙∙ 120 Degree Corner Countertop

STORAGE

Notes

ACCESSORIES

∙∙ Grain direction runs along width of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Edgeband Countertops are 15"D. ∙∙ Order counter top brackets separately.

SEATING

Description

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-PXVCT3030T M-PXVCT3636T M-PXVCT4242T M-PXVCT4848T

30" 36" 42" 48"

30" 36" 42" 48"

35.0 40.0 46.0 53.0

4.9 6.6 8.4 10.3

750 850 950 1050

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

120 Corner Countertop 30Dx30W WITH SUPPORT 120 Corner Countertop 36Dx36W WITH SUPPORT 120 Corner Countertop 42Dx42W WITH SUPPORT 120 Corner Countertop 48Dx48W WITH SUPPORT

Model

151

SIN 711-1

PREFIX Straight Countertop: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Straight Countertop

Notes ∙∙ Order counter top brackets separately. ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ T-Mold Countertops are 12"D.

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

Model

Description

M-PXCT1212T M-PXCT1218T M-PXCT1224T M-PXCT1230T M-PXCT1236T M-PXCT1242T M-PXCT1248T M-PXCT1254T M-PXCT1260T M-PXCT1266T M-PXCT1272T

n n n n n n n n n n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12"

12" 18" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

0.7 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0

240 252 261 269 279 289 305 314 325 333 344

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Prefix Straight Countertop, T-Mold

D

STORAGE

PREPARE

D 12"

D 151⁄2"

W 24"

W 24"

PREFIX Straight Countertop: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Straight Countertop

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

Notes

152

∙∙ Order counter top brackets separately. ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Edgeband Countertops are 151⁄2"D.

Description

Model

Prefix Straight Countertop, Edgeband.

M-PXCT1512E M-PXCT1518E M-PXCT1524E M-PXCT1530E M-PXCT1536E M-PXCT1542E M-PXCT1548E M-PXCT1554E M-PXCT1560E M-PXCT1566E M-PXCT1572E

n n n n n n n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

12" 18" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

1.0 1.2 1.4 1.7 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.3 3.6 3.9

330 349 364 381 399 415 439 454 476 489 506

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

PREFIX 90º Corner Countertop: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ 90º Corner Countertop.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Order counter top brackets separately. ∙∙ Grain direction runs diagonally along worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ T-Mold Countertops are 12"D.

Prefix 90º Corner Countertop, T-Mold

M-PXCCT122424T M-PXCCT123030T M-PXCCT123636T M-PXCCT124242T M-PXCCT124848T

n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

12" 12" 12" 12" 12"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48"

21 31 41 51 61

3.8 5.0 6.5 6.7 8.3

473 556 683 856 979

SURPASS

D 151⁄2 "

D 12" W 24"

W 24"

Corner (T-mold)

Corner (T-mold)

WORKSURFACES

Model

PREFIX

Description

PREPARE

PREFIX 90º Corner Countertop: Edgeband STORAGE

Includes ∙∙ 90º Corner Countertop.

Notes ACCESSORIES

∙∙ Order counter top brackets separately. ∙∙ Grain direction runs diagonally along of worksurface (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Edgeband Countertops are 151⁄2"D.

Model

Prefix 90º Corner Countertop, Edgeband

M-PXCCT152424E M-PXCCT153030E M-PXCCT153636E M-PXCCT154242E M-PXCCT154848E

n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

15" 15" 15" 15" 15"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48"

25 35 45 55 65

4.1 5.4 6.9 7.2 8.9

598 708 793 925 1011

SEATING

Description

INDEX

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

153

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

Rectangular Worksurface Support Kit (Rectangular, Transition, Arc Worktops) Includes ∙∙ Tie Bracket (1), Cantilevered Worksurface Bracket-Left & attachment hardware (1), and Cantilevered Worksurface

PREFIX

EMERGE

Bracket-Right & attachment hardware (1 for M-UWSKR2, 2 for M-UWSKR3).

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Description Rectangular Worksurface Support Kit

Rectangular Worksurface Support Kit for 20 deep

Rectangular Worksurface Support Kit

Rectangular Worksurface Support Kit for 20 deep

Model M-UWSKR2

n

M-UWSKR2-20

M-UWSKR3

n

M-UWSKR3-20

Wt.

Cubes

List

17

1.4

116

17

1.3

113

26

1.4

153

25

1.3

149

PREFIX Corner Worksurface Support Kit (Straight & Radius Front, Transition) ∙∙ Tie Bracket (1), Cantilevered Worksurface Bracket-Left & attachment hardware (1), Cantilevered Worksurface Bracket-

Right & attachment hardware (1), and Bracket Support.

Description

Model

Corner Worksurface Support Kit

M-UWSKC

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

18

1.4

123

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

Includes

154

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

L-Return Worksurface Support Kit (Straight & Radius Front) Includes ∙∙ Tie Bracket (1), Cantilevered Worksurface Bracket-Left & attachment hardware (1), Cantilevered Worksurface Bracket-

Right & attachment hardware (2), and Bracket Support.

EMERGE PREFIX

Model

L-Return Worksurface Support Kit

M-UWSKL

Wt.

Cubes

List

n

26

1.4

153

WORKSURFACES

Description

SURPASS

Worksurface Stanchions Includes ∙∙ Stanchion

PREPARE

Notes ∙∙ Models ending in WT are to be used when a worktop is placed on the storage unit.

Wt.

Cubes

List

Worksurface Support Stanchion 5H x 12D Worksurface Support Stanchion 5H x 18D

M-USS0512WT M-USS0518WT

Worksurface Support Stanchion 6H x 12D

M-USS0612

3.5 4.1 3.5

0.5 0.7 0.5

287 303 303

Worksurface Support Stanchion 6H x 18D Worksurface Support Stanchion 10H x 12D Worksurface Support Stanchion 10H x 18D

M-USS0618 M-USS1012WT M-USS1018WT

4.1

0.7

318

1.2 1.4 1.2

240 255 325

1.4

340

Worksurface Support Stanchion 11H x 12D

M-USS1112

3 5 3

Worksurface Support Stanchion 11H x 18D

M-USS1118

5

ACCESSORIES

Model

STORAGE

Worksurface Stanchions

Description

SEATING INDEX

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

155

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

Peninsula Worksurface Support Kit (Radius, b, d, Grand, Curved) Includes

EMERGE

∙∙ Tie Bracket (1), Universal Support Column (1), Bracket Supports (1 Pair).

Model

Peninsula Worksurface Support Kit

M-UWSKP

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

12

1

252

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

Description

Half-Round Extension - Fixed - Worksurface Support Kit Includes ∙∙ Tie Bracket (1), 24" Flat Bracket (2), Universal Support Column (1).

Description

Model

Half Round Extension - Fixed Worksurface Support Kit

M-UWSKHF

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

32

2.6

362

Universal Worksurface Support Column

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

Includes

156

∙∙ Universal Worksurface Support Column.

Description Universal Worksurface Support Column

Model M-USC

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

10

1

211

Universal Worksurface Support Leg Includes ∙∙ Universal Worksurface Support Leg and a 7x7 mounting plate.

Description

Model

Wt.

Cubes

List

Universal Worksurface Support Leg 29.5"

M-UWSL29

6.7

3.1

230

Universal Worksurface Support Leg 40.5"

M-UWSL40

10

4.1

270

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

Cantilevered Worksurface Bracket M-C1L Shown

Includes ∙∙ Cantilevered Worksurface Bracket

EMERGE

Cubes

List

Cantilevered Worksurface Bracket, Left-Handed

M-C1L

9

1.4

59

Cantilevered Worksurface Bracket, Right-Handed

M-C1R

n

9

1.4

59

PREFIX

Wt. n

Model

Description

WORKSURFACES

Worksurface Support Flat Bracket Includes

Model

Worksurface Support Flat Bracket, 24"

M-FB24

n

Worksurface Support Flat Bracket, 30"

M-FB30

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

3 5

0.3 0.8

55 77

PREPARE

Description

SURPASS

∙∙ Worksurface Support Flat Bracket.

STORAGE

Connecting Top/120° Bridge Support Kit

ACCESSORIES

Includes ∙∙ Tie Bracket (1), and 24" Flat Bracket (2).

Model

Connecting Top/ 120° Bridge Support Kit

M-UWSKCT

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

19

1.4

121

SEATING

Description

INDEX

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

157

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

Universal Worksurface End Panel Support Includes ∙∙ Universal Worksurface End Panel Support, panel mounting brackets and adjustable glides.

∙∙ 28" High for desk height applications. ∙∙ Used in EMERGE and PREFIX panel environments only.

D

Wt.

Cubes

List

n

28"

12"

11

2.8

274

SURPASS

Universal Worksurface End Panel Support, 12" D, Right-Handed

M-PMEP12R

n

28"

12"

11

2.8

274

Universal Worksurface End Panel Support, 24" D, Left-Handed

M-PMEP24L

n

28"

24"

22

2.8

335

PREPARE

Universal Worksurface End Panel Support, 24" D, RIght-Handed

M-PMEP24R

n

28"

24"

22

2.8

335

Universal Worksurface End Panel Support, 30" D, Left-Handed

M-PMEP30L

n

28"

30"

25

2.8

373

Universal Worksurface End Panel Support, 30" D, Right-Handed

M-PMEP30R

n

28"

30"

25

2.8

373

ACCESSORIES

H

STORAGE

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

Notes

Description

Model

Universal Worksurface End Panel Support, 12" D, Left-Handed

M-PMEP12L

Universal Panel Mounted Worksurface Open Leg Support Includes ∙∙ Leg and hardware

INDEX

SEATING

Notes ∙∙ 28" high for desk height applications ∙∙ Used in EMERGE and PREFIX (panel environments only)

Cubes

List

M-UPMOL24L M-UPMOL24R

25 25

2.3 2.3

306 306

M-UPMOL30L

n

27

2.3

320

M-UPMOL30R

n

27

2.3

320

Model

Universal Panel Mounted Open Leg Support, 24"

Universal Panel Mounted Open Leg Support, 30"

158

Wt. n n

Description

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

Universal Worksurface C-Leg Support Includes ∙∙ Worksurface C-Leg Support, panel mounting brackets and adjustable glides.

Guidelines for support and design EMERGE PREFIX

All wall track system worksurfaces must be floor supported by an end panel, c-leg, pedestal or lateral file, with one floor support at each end of the worksurface run and a maximum spacing of 8' between floor supports. • Specify worksurfaces from worksurface section of the pricebook with “No Cantilever" option. • All hardware to attach the system to the wall must be supplied by the customer. • Wall starters add 1" of creep. • To maximize load bearing capability, fasten components to wall studs. • Maxon furnished components are tested to load requirements equal to BIFMA panel standards. • Load capacity will vary depending on mounting application. (i.e. wall material, type of hardware used, etc…)

Notes 28" High for desk height applications. Center C-Leg provides additional support for longer worksurfaces and does not mount to panel. Double C-Legs allow two adjoining worksurfaces to be supported by a common leg. Double C-Legs are symmetrical and need not be specified for Right-Hand or Left-Hand installation.

WORKSURFACES

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

SURPASS PREPARE

M-EMCL18C Does not mount to panel

M-EMCL24-30 Panel Mount

Model

Universal Worksurface Center C-Leg Support, 18" D,

Cubes

List

M-EMCL18C

28"

18"

10

2.8

364

Universal Worksurface C-Leg Support, 24" D, Left-Handed

M-EMCL24L

n

28"

24"

14

2.8

616

Universal Worksurface C-Leg Support, 24" D, Right-Handed

M-EMCL24R

n

28"

24"

14

2.8

616

Universal Worksurface C-Leg Support, 30" D, Left-Handed

M-EMCL30L

n

28"

30"

18

2.8

645

Universal Worksurface C-Leg Support, 30" D, Right-Handed

M-EMCL30R

n

28"

30"

18

2.8

645

Universal Worksurface C-Leg Support, 18" D, Double

M-EMCL18D

n

28"

18"

11

2.8

592

Universal Worksurface C-Leg Support, 24" D, Double

M-EMCL24D

n

28"

24"

15

2.8

616

Universal Worksurface C-Leg Support, 30" D, Double

M-EMCL30D

n

28"

30"

19

2.8

645

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

Wt.

SEATING

D

ACCESSORIES

H n

STORAGE

Description

159

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

Worksurface Support - Attaching Bracket Includes

Notes ∙∙ Worksurface Support-Attaching Bracket is for attaching the fronts of two Worksurfaces. ∙∙ Also used for attaching Straight Countertops to Corner Countertops.

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Worksurfaces Support-Attaching Bracket.

WORKSURFACES SURPASS PREPARE STORAGE ACCESSORIES

Model

Description Worksurface Support - Attaching Bracket Worksurface Support - Attaching Bracket (Packet of 10)

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-DAB1

n

0.1

0.3

17

M-DAB10

n

1

0.3

69

Worksurface Support - Return Worksurface Bracket Includes ∙∙ Worksurface Support- Return Worksurface Bracket.

Model

Description Return Worksurface Bracket (Pair)

M-CWB2

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

0.4

0.3

31

Universal Worksurface Tower Support Includes

INDEX

SEATING

∙∙ Universal Worksurface Tower Support Bracket.

160

Notes ∙∙ Intended to attach the side of the work surface to the side of the storage tower.

Description

Model

Wt.

Cubes

List

Universal Worksurface Tower Support Bracket

M-TB2W1

1

0.5

40

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

Worksurface Support - Wall Mounted Slotted Wall Strip Includes ∙∙ Wall Mounted Slotted Wall Strip with End Cover.

EMERGE

Notes Used for overhead storage components and/or to attach worksurfaces to permanent wall. Worksurfaces must be floor supported. Do not mount on masonry walls. Wall fasteners not included. 1 Per pack. Do not trim down. 17⁄8"W X 1"D Wall Strip has 1⁄8" X 1⁄2" slots on 1" centers.

Wall Mounted Slotted Wall Strip, 65" H

M-WMSWS65

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

1

0.5

92

WORKSURFACES

Model

Description

PREFIX

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

SURPASS

Countertop Flat Bracket Includes

PREPARE

∙∙ Countertop Flat Bracket

Notes ∙∙ Not intended for use with Worksurfaces.

M-CTFB

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

0.2

0.3

32

ACCESSORIES

Countertop Flat Bracket

Model

STORAGE

Description

SEATING INDEX

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

161

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

Wall Track - Worksurface Mount Kit Includes ∙∙ Two Wall Tracks and two wall track cantilevers for up to 60" lengths, four Wall Tracks and three wall track cantilevers over

PREFIX

EMERGE

60".

Notes ∙∙ Specify one Worksurface Mount Kit for each length of worksurface that will be mounted to the wall (ex. for 24" x

36" rectangular surface that will be mounted in a corner, specify one 24" worksurface Wall Track Kit and one 36" Worksurface Wall Track Kit). Do not trim down. ∙∙ All wall track system worksurfaces must be floor supported by an end panel, pedestal or lateral file, with one floor support at each end of the worksurface run and a maximum spacing of 8' between floor supports. ∙∙ Refer to Wall Track End Panels. 18"

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

W

162

101⁄2"

Wt.

Cubes

List

n

2

0.3

212

M-WTWM30

n

2

0.3

223

Wall Track - Worksurface Mount Kit, 36" W

M-WTWM36

n

2

0.4

238

Wall Track - Worksurface Mount Kit, 42" W

M-WTWM42

n

3

0.5

244

Wall Track - Worksurface Mount Kit, 48" W

M-WTWM48

n

3

0.5

254

Wall Track - Worksurface Mount Kit, 60" W

M-WTWM60

n

4

0.7

270

Wall Track - Worksurface Mount Kit, 66" W

M-WTWM66

n

4

0.7

322

Wall Track - Worksurface Mount Kit, 72" W

M-WTWM72

n

5

0.8

366

Wall Track - Worksurface Mount Kit, 78" W

M-WTWM78

n

5

0.8

374

Wall Track - Worksurface Mount Kit, 84" W

M-WTWM84

n

6

0.9

380

Description

Model

Wall Track - Worksurface Mount Kit, 24" W

M-WTWM24

Wall Track - Worksurface Mount Kit, 30" W

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-1

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS REFERENCE

Wall Track - End Panel Includes ∙∙ Wall Track End Panel, 1 wall track bracket and adjustable glides.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Use in conjunction with Worksurfaces and Wall Track Worksurface Mount

Kit (M-WTWM) for end panel support applications. ∙∙ Specify right or left hand installation. ∙∙ Refer to Wall Tack Overhead Cabinets with Epoxy Painted Doors.

PREFIX

Left-Handed Version Shown

List

n

16

0.9

335

M-WTSEPH24R

n

16

0.9

335

Wall Track - End Panel 30" D, Left-Handed

M-WTSEPH30L

n

19

1.1

373

Wall Track - End Panel 30" D, Right-Handed

M-WTSEPH30R

n

19

1.1

373

Wall Track - End Panel 24" D, Left-Handed

M-WTSEPH24L

Wall Track - End Panel 24" D, Right-Handed

SURPASS

Cubes

Model

WORKSURFACES

Wt.

Description

PREPARE STORAGE

PREFIX Countertop Support Bracket Includes ∙∙ 2 brackets, 1 left and 1 right, and hardware

ACCESSORIES

Notes ∙∙ Order 2 sets of brackets for each countertop

Standard Countertop Support

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-P51500

n

1.0

0.1

49

M-P51500-42

n

1.0

0.1

49

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

42.5" Base Panel Countertop Support

Model

SEATING

Description

163

REFERENCE

WORKSURFACES & SUPPORTS

SIN 711-1

Left Linear J Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Left Linear J Worksurface.

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Worksurfaces 72" or above require middle support unless specified with a modesty panel. Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). Worksurface support kits are specified separately. Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDWRT2424N

Model

Description

PREFIX

EMERGE

Notes

WORKSURFACES

Left Linear J Worksurface, Edgeband, 24Ax20B

Left Linear J Worksurface, Edgeband, 30Ax24B

M-MDLJE2460L M-MDLJE2466L M-MDLJE2472L M-MDLJE2478L M-MDLJE2484L M-MDLJE3060L M-MDLJE3066L M-MDLJE3072L M-MDLJE3078L M-MDLJE3084L

Length A

Length B

Length C

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

20" 20" 20" 20" 20" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

60" 66" 72" 78" 84" 60" 66" 72" 78" 84"

42.2 43.8 48.2 51.8 54.5 53.9 53.6 59.1 63.9 67.7

4.1 4.1 4.4 5.3 5.7 5.0 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.4

1000 1075 1150 1225 1300 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500

SURPASS

C

C

A

PREPARE

A

B

B

Right Linear J Worksurface: Edgeband

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

LINEAR J LEFT HAND

Includes ∙∙ Right Linear J Worksurface.

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Worksurfaces 72" or above require middle support unless specified with a modesty panel. Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). Worksurface support kits are specified separately. Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDWRT2424N

Description

Right Linear J Worksurface, Edgeband, 24Ax20B

Right Linear J Worksurface, Edgeband, 30Ax24B

Model M-MDLJE2460R M-MDLJE2466R M-MDLJE2472R M-MDLJE2478R M-MDLJE2484R M-MDLJE3060R M-MDLJE3066R M-MDLJE3072R M-MDLJE3078R M-MDLJE3084R

164

LINEAR J RIGHT HAND

Length A

Length B

Length C

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

20" 20" 20" 20" 20" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

60" 66" 72" 78" 84" 60" 66" 72" 78" 84"

42.2 43.8 48.2 51.8 54.5 53.9 53.6 59.1 63.9 67.7

4.1 4.1 4.4 5.3 5.7 5.0 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.4

1000 1075 1150 1225 1300 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500

*WORKSURFACES list cost includes core finishes. Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE EMERGE PREFIX

Benefits

End panels constructed with foam core.

Provide strength, rigidity, and sound-absorption.

Electrical and data management options.

Strategically run power or data to where it is needed.

End panels, and bridging brackets work for right or left-hand applications.

Eases specification and installation.

Straight and corner steel hutches with top-mounted hinged doors or sliding acrylic doors.

Provide storage and space division.

Fabric and glass screens.

Allows collaboration while providing visual privacy.

INDEX

Prevent warping and bowing while assuring years of use.

SEATING

Finest quality worksurface construction.

ACCESSORIES

Features

STORAGE

SURPASS offers straight steel hutch options with top-mounted hinged doors. The hutch accepts tackboards, task lights and personal accessory rail components. Coordinating pedestal and lateral files, bookcases, storage towers and personal storage centers ensure the perfect solution for every storage need.

PREPARE

The double-wall construction of SURPASS support legs and steel modesty panels adds strength and durability throughout the system. Modesty panels are available with an optional sound-deadening insert, reducing ambient noise. Impact-resistant, high-pressure laminate worksurfaces with threaded-metal inserts can endure multiple reconfigurations, are strong enough to endure years of day-to-day use, and are available in a wide selection of colors and wood-grain patterns. A wide variety of desk shapes and sizes means you will find the right fit no matter what your needs.

SURPASS

SURPASS freestanding desking offers solid construction with almost unlimited versatility and flexibility. You can build a private office, collaborative teaming station, benching solution or combine it with panels for more privacy. The heavy-duty steel construction and modular design means that SURPASS can be reconfigured as your needs change and still perform in any office environment. Available in all of Maxon’s fabrics and finishes, SURPASS will look good long after it’s installed and in use. And, of course, it’s backed by the Limited Lifetime Warranty.

WORKSURFACES

SURPASS Desking System

Prices effective January 4, 2016. Information in this pricebook is accurate as of January 4, 2016. The pricebook is updated monthly. Go to www. MaxonEdge.com to find the most current pricing information in the electronic pricebook. Information is updated monthly in CAD and GIZA. Maxon recommends updating 20-20 Technologies software every month. *Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

165

SURPASS

SIN 711-2

EMERGE

REFERENCE

Working with SURPASS End Panels  E and Support Legs

L

Return Kits

Each are available in two options: freestanding or panel‑mount. The only difference between the two options are the panel-mount models come with a left- or right‑handed bracket to attach the support to a panel in a SURPASS systems application. If the freestanding version is purchased and later needs to be converted to panel-mount, the proper handed panel-mount bracket may be purchased separately.

Return kits include: one flat bracket, one modesty panelto-end panel attachment bracket, and one tie strap. These are used when attaching a return to a primary desk. Return kits can also be used in some bridge applications — one example is shown below when using a peninsula.

Corner Desk Legs

Bridge Kits

C

R

S

L

B M+12

R

M

E

B

M+6

S

S

PREPARE STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING

E

B

SC

Desk-to-Panel Attachment Kits

D

Desk-to-panel attachment kits are used to connect a worksurface and modesty panel perpendicular to a panel of corresponding width. Opposing end of worksurface must be attached with an end-panel, support leg, or corner leg mounted directly under this worksurface. When using a corner or corner cove worksurface with the rear corner attached to a panel, and opposing end of worksurface is attached to a freestanding desk, use corner w/desk attachment kit. Hand of unit is determined from the user’s side of the desk (right hand unit attaches to right side of modesty).

Bridge Kit CBK29 M-MDCBK29 There are some bridge instances where only half of a bridge kit is needed (e.g. using a bridge between a rectangular worksurface and a corner or peninsula). A return kit may be ordered for these instances.

Surface

S

S

SC

Support columns are used to support one end of curvilinear worksurfaces. Includes column, worksurface bracket kit M-MDPC29, attaching hardware, and adjustable glides.

Standard Modesty Panels M INDEX

M+6

Bridge kits include: two flat brackets, two modesty panel-to-end panel attachment brackets, and two tie straps. This kit is used when attaching a bridge unit between two rectangular worksurfaces.

Support Column

Modesty panel width is the same width as the worksurface.

Stand-Alone Corner Modesty Panels SM

Stand-alone corner modesty panels are used only when one or both sides of a corner or L-Return worksurface are freestanding.

166

Return Kit CRK29

S

Corner desk legs have a 90-degree bend and welded construction. The strong construction allows gussets or half‑height modesty panels to be used with corner legs.

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

The 12"D end panel is used to freestand peninsulas, curvilinear shapes, and D-tops in panel applications.

M

D

E Desk-to-Panel Attachment Kit, RH CDPA29R – Concensys® M-MDPMBRH TKDPA29R – Optimize or Terrace®

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS

Corner Desk (Stand-alone)

Corner Desk (With an adjacent desk attached at one side.)

SM

SM

T-Mold Edge Corner Worksurface 24"D x 36"W T-Mold Edge Worksurface 24"D x 36"W Stand-Alone Corner Modesty Panel 36"W x 291⁄2"H Modesty Panel 36"W x 291⁄2"H End-Panel Support 24"D x 291⁄2"H Support Leg 24"D x 291⁄2"H Corner Desk Leg 291⁄2"H

M-MDCST2436 M-MDWRT2436 M-MDMPC36F M-MDMP36FP M-MDEP24 M-MDSL M-MDCDL29

C

E

E

EMERGE

Descripton

1 1 1 2 2 1 1

REFERENCE

S

Example Shown Qty. Model

S

Example Shown Qty. Model

M-MDCST2436 M-MDMPC36F M-MDEP24 M-MDCDL23

S

C M

Descripton

T-Mold Edge Worksurface 24"D x 36"W Stand-Alone Corner Modesty Panel 36"W x 291⁄2"H End-Panel Support 24"D x 291⁄2"H Corner Desk Leg 291⁄2"H

L

M

E E

Example Shown Qty. Model

S

M-MDWRT2436 M-MDWRT2436 M-MDCRK29 M-MDSL

Descripton

T-Mold Edge Worksurface 24"D x 36"W Modesty Panel 42"W x 291⁄2"H Return Kit Support Leg 24"D x 291⁄2"H

M+6 L

ACCESSORIES

R

STORAGE

1 1 1 1

PREPARE

Bridge Desk (Attached between corner and primary desk.)

SURPASS

Modesty Panel Stand-Alone Corner Desk- Corner CONFIGURATION Work- End-Panel Desk Modesty Panel to-Panel Desk OPTION surface Support Support Same 6" wider (S) (E) Leg width as than Same Attachment Leg (L) Work- Work- width as Kit (C) surface surface Work- (D) (M) (M+6) surface (SM) Corner Desk 1 2 2 1 Corner Desk (with adjacent desk) 2 2 1 2 1 1

WORKSURFACES

1 2 2 1

PREFIX

SM

SEATING

Bridge Desk

INDEX

CONFIGURATION Work- End-Panel Desk Modesty Panel Desk- Corner Return surface Support Support Same 6" wider 12" wider to-Panel Desk Kit (S) (E) Leg width as than than Attachment Leg (R) (L) Work- Work- Work- Kit (C) surface surface surface (D) (M) (M+6) (M+12) 1 1 1 1

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

167

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

SIN 711-2

Worksurface Specifications ∙∙ Worksurfaces use 1.184” thick high-density particleboard. ∙∙ Top surfaces are high pressure laminate and the undersides have a moisture-resistant backing to prevent warping. Total 3 thickness 1 ⁄16”. 1 ∙∙ Desk shells are 29 ⁄4” tall. ∙∙ Worksurfaces are available in T-Mold (with ½” radius corners) or Edgeband edge treatments (with a squared edge). 1 ∙∙ Worksurfaces include 3 ⁄2” x 2” rectangular grommets with caps. ∙∙ Worksurfaces include pre-installed metal inserts for end supports. Modesty panels attached with wood screws. ∙∙ Meets or exceeds all ANSI-BIFMA standards. ∙∙ List price shown applies to laminates listed on the Maxon Core Laminate Finishes Card.

∙∙ Straight Front Corners

Point-to-Point straight front for 24"x36", 24"x42", 30"x42" and 30"x48" corner; Wings on 24"x48", 24"x60" and 30"x60". ∙∙ Radius Front Corners 11" radius on all corners. ∙∙ Grain direction runs diagonally along worksurface (directional laminates only).

Straight Front

Radius Front W 48"

W 42"

11" Radius

D 24" (Wings on 24" x 48", 24" x 60" and 30" x 60"

D 24"

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Corner Desk Specifications

168

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS

∙∙ Shells, returns, and bridgetops with modesty panels feature horizontal and vertical wire management trays.

1

∙∙ Modesty panels are available in full-height (27 ⁄2”) and half-height (14”) for access to wall electrical. ∙∙ For adequate clearance of files, specify storage component depths that are at least 6” less than the understructure depth.

∙∙ End panels and bridging brackets are symmetrical and may be used for right- or left-hand support at any time.

PREFIX

End Support and Bridging Bracket Specifications

EMERGE

∙∙ SURPASS modesty panels are constructed of two pieces of commercial grade steel sandwiching a structural (foam) core for strength rigidity and sound-absorption.

REFERENCE

Modesty Panel Specifications

∙∙ The Peninsula shell supports consist of one 12” end panels, one support leg end panel and one round column leg.

Storage Hutch Specifications 3

∙∙ Storage Hutches may be ordered with an open back. Painted metal backs with a fabric surfaced tackboards are also available as an option. Backs and tackboards are also available for retrofit applications.

∙∙ On 54”- 72” hutches, both hutch doors are automatically keyed alike. Beyond that, all pairs of keyed locks installed on hutch doors are randomly keyed, with no attempt to assure either the same or different keying between different hutch units.

STORAGE

∙∙ Hutch doors may be keyed-alike to match floor pedestal or lateral file lock. Refer to page 203 for details.

PREPARE

∙∙ SURPASS Hutches will accept task lights. Personal Accessory Rails are also available for use with the hutches to accommodate our complete line of paper management trays, bins, and other storage components.

SURPASS

∙∙ Storage Hutches are 35 ⁄4” high x 14” deep and, when installed, have a floor to top-of-hutch height of 65”. The vertical side supports are constructed of 20 gauge formed steel. All hutches have a matching width, fully enclosed storage bin. Hutch bin bases and lids are constructed of 16 gauge formed steel. All points of connection in the assembly are steel-to-steel for added strength and durability.

WORKSURFACES

∙∙ Corner Desk shell supports include two 12" support legs and one corner leg support for the back corner.

ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

169

SIN 711-2

Typical SURPASS Desking Configurations Typical configurations are commonly ordered layouts shown for planning and budgeting purposes. List pricing for typical configurations is based on Core Laminates and Paint and T-Mold edge finish. Models MUST be ordered individually.

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

Includes: Core (C) Laminate Core Paint Grade A Fabric T-Mold Edge

170

6'x7'6" SURPASS Private Office MODEL #

DESCRIPTION

QTY

LIST $

M-LF230-A

Ridgeline Lateral- 2-Dwr 30W A-Pull

1

$1,403

M-MDBFE3072

Desking Bow-Front Work Surface 30Dx72W EB

1

$687

M-MDEP24

Maxon Desking End Panel Leg 24"

4

$840

M-MDMP72HP

Maxon Desking Modesty Panel 72" Half Mod

2

$380

M-MDHO72E

Max Desking FullHtch 15x72 Opn Lwr.Bk StlPtd Drs

1

$1,692

M-MDWRE2442

Desking 24D x 42W Rectangular Work Surface

1

$466

M-MDWRE2472

Desking 24D x 72W Rectangular Work Surface

1

$642

M-MDMP42HP

Maxon Desking Modesty Panel 42" Half Mod

1

$150

M-MDCBK29

Maxon Desking Bridge Kit Support

1

$175

TOTAL EXTENDED LIST: $6,435

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS

Typical configurations are commonly ordered layouts shown for planning and budgeting purposes. List pricing for typical configurations is based on Core Laminates and Paint and T-Mold edge finish. Models MUST be ordered individually.

REFERENCE

Typical SURPASS Desking Configurations

EMERGE PREFIX WORKSURFACES SURPASS PREPARE

Includes: Core (C) Laminate Core Paint T-Mold Edge

STORAGE

DESCRIPTION

LIST $

Sys & Desk Univ Pedestal 20Dx15Wx28H BBF A-Pull

1

$591

M-MDEP24

Maxon Desking End Panel Leg 24"

2

$420

M-MDMP60HP

Maxon Desking Modesty Panel 60" Half Mod

1

$170

M-MDWRE2460

Desking 24D x 60W Rectangular Work Surface

1

$549

TOTAL EXTENDED LIST: $1,730

SEATING

QTY

M-SYP20B-A

ACCESSORIES

5'x2' SURPASS Single Desk MODEL #

INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

171

SIN 711-2

Typical SURPASS Desking Configurations Typical configurations are commonly ordered layouts shown for planning and budgeting purposes. List pricing for typical configurations is based on Core Laminates and Paint, Grade A Fabric and T-Mold edge finish. Models MUST be ordered individually.

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

Includes: Core (C) Laminate Core Paint Clear Glass Upholstery Fabric T-Mold Edge

172

SURPASS Benching Desk 6 Pack MODEL # M-ESM24BF-A

DESCRIPTION Short Mobile Pedestal - 23"D BF A-pull

QTY 6

LIST $ $4,218

M-ESM24SEAT

Pedestal Seat Cushion 23"D x 15"W

6

$1,848

M-MDDS1360G

Maxon Desk Screen 13Hx60W Glass

3

$2,820

M-MDWRE2460

Desking 24D x 60W Rectangular Work Surface

6

$3,294

M-MDMP60HP

Maxon Desking Modesty Panel 60" Half Mod

2

$340

M-MDSL

Maxon Support Leg

4

$780

M-MDOL24

Maxon Desking Open Leg 24"

4

$1,200

M-MDMPEB60HP

Maxon Desking EB Modesty Panel 60" Half Mod

4

$840

TOTAL EXTENDED LIST: $15,340

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS

Typical configurations are commonly ordered layouts shown for planning and budgeting purposes. List pricing for typical configurations is based on Core Laminates and Paint, Grade A Fabric and T-Mold edge finish. Models MUST be ordered individually.

REFERENCE

Typical SURPASS Desking Configurations

EMERGE PREFIX WORKSURFACES SURPASS PREPARE

Includes: Core (C) Laminate Core Paint T-Mold Edge

STORAGE

DESCRIPTION

QTY

LIST $

1

$591

M-MDEP24

Maxon Desking End Panel Leg 24"

2

$420

M-MDMP72HP

Maxon Desking Modesty Panel 72" Half Mod

1

$190

M-MDHO72E

Max Desking FullHtch 15x72 Opn Lwr.Bk StlPtd Drs

1

$1,692

M-MDWRE2448

Desking 24D x 48W Rectangular Work Surface

1

$504

M-MDWRE2472

Desking 24D x 72W Rectangular Work Surface

1

$642

M-MDMP48HP

Maxon Desking Modesty Panel 48" Half Mod

1

$155

M-MDEP24

Maxon Desking End Panel Leg 24"

1

$210

TOTAL EXTENDED LIST: $4,404

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

Sys & Desk Univ Pedestal 20Dx15Wx28H BBF A-Pull

SEATING

M-SYP20B-A

ACCESSORIES

6x6 SURPASS Desk MODEL #

173

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

SIN 711-2

Rectangular Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Rectangular Worksurface.

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Worksurfaces 72" or above require middle support unless specified with a modesty panel. Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDWRT2424N

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

Notes

D 24"

Description

Rectangular Worksurface, T-Mold, 24" D

Rectangular Worksurface, T-Mold, 30" D

Model M-MDWRT2424 M-MDWRT2430 M-MDWRT2436 M-MDWRT2442 M-MDWRT2448 M-MDWRT2454 M-MDWRT2460 M-MDWRT2466 M-MDWRT2472 M-MDWRT3024 M-MDWRT3030 M-MDWRT3036 M-MDWRT3042 M-MDWRT3048 M-MDWRT3054 M-MDWRT3060 M-MDWRT3066 M-MDWRT3072

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

25 29 33 38 42 46 51 55 59 29 35 39 45 51 55 61 66 72

1.8 2.2 2.7 3.1 3.5 3.9 4.3 4.7 5.1 2.2 2.8 3.3 3.8 4.3 4.8 5.3 5.8 6.3

343 364 391 415 452 472 504 544 586 415 440 464 492 526 553 574 622 673

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

W 36”

174

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

Rectangular Worksurface: Edgeband

EMERGE

Includes ∙∙ Rectangular Worksurface.

Notes Worksurfaces 72" or above require middle support unless specified with a modesty panel. Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDWRE2424N

PREFIX

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

WORKSURFACES

D 24"

W 36”

Rectangular Worksurface, Edgeband, 24" D

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

25 29 33 38 42 46 51 55 59 29 35 39 45 51 55 61 66 72

1.8 2.2 2.7 3.1 3.5 3.9 4.3 4.7 5.1 2.2 2.8 3.3 3.8 4.3 4.8 5.3 5.8 6.3

399 421 446 466 504 525 549 595 642 446 466 493 514 549 571 597 642 687

ACCESSORIES

n

W

STORAGE

M-MDWRE2424 M-MDWRE2430 M-MDWRE2436 M-MDWRE2442 M-MDWRE2448 M-MDWRE2454 M-MDWRE2460 M-MDWRE2466 M-MDWRE2472 M-MDWRE3024 M-MDWRE3030 M-MDWRE3036 M-MDWRE3042 M-MDWRE3048 M-MDWRE3054 M-MDWRE3060 M-MDWRE3066 M-MDWRE3072

D

PREPARE

Rectangular Worksurface, Edgeband, 30" D

Model

SURPASS

Description

SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

175

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

Bowfront Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Bowfront worksurface

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Surface has 6" overhang Worksurfaces 72" or above require middle support unless specified with a modesty panel. Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDBFT3060N Model

Description

Bowfront Worksurface, T-Mold, 24/30" D

Bowfront Worksurface, T-Mold, 30/36" D

M-MDBFT3060 M-MDBFT3066 M-MDBFT3072

n

M-MDBFT3660 M-MDBFT3666 M-MDBFT3672

n

n n

n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24/30" 24/30" 24/30"

60" 66" 72"

61 66 72

5.3 5.8 6.3

574 622 673

30/36" 30/36" 30/36"

60" 66" 72"

71 77 82

6.3 6.9 7.5

664 717 752

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

SIN 711-2

D 30/36"

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

D 30/36"

176

W 66”

W 66"

Bowfront Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Bowfront worksurface

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDBFE3060N

Description

Bowfront Worksurface, Edgeband, 24/30" D

Bowfront Worksurface, Edgeband, 30/36" D

Model M-MDBFE3060 M-MDBFE3066 M-MDBFE3072

n

M-MDBFE3660 M-MDBFE3666 M-MDBFE3672

n

n n

n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24/30" 24/30" 24/30"

60" 66" 72"

61 66 72

5.3 5.8 6.3

597 642 687

30/36" 30/36" 30/36"

60" 66" 72"

71 77 82

6.3 6.9 7.5

663 708 753

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

Executive Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Rectangular worksurface

EMERGE

Notes

Model

Description

Executive Worksurface, T-Mold, 36" D

M-MDEFT3060 M-MDEFT3066 M-MDEFT3072 M-MDEFT3660 M-MDEFT3666 M-MDEFT3672

n n n n n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

30" 30" 30"

60" 66" 72"

61 66 72

5.3 5.8 6.3

574 622 673

30/36" 30/36" 30/36"

60" 66" 72"

71 77 82

6.3 6.9 7.5

664 717 752

WORKSURFACES

Executive Worksurface, T-Mold, 30" D

D

PREFIX

∙∙ Surface has 6" overhang ∙∙ Worksurfaces 72" or above require middle support unless specified with a modesty panel. Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDEFT3060N

SURPASS

D 30/36"

D 30/36"

PREPARE

W 66”

W 66"

STORAGE

Executive Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Rectangular worksurface

ACCESSORIES

Notes

Description

Executive Worksurface, Edgeband, 30" D

M-MDEFE3060 M-MDEFE3066 M-MDEFE3072

n

M-MDEFE3660 M-MDEFE3666 M-MDEFE3672

n

n n

n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

30" 30" 30"

60" 66" 72"

61 66 72

5.3 5.8 6.3

597 642 687

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

71 77 82

6.3 6.9 7.5

663 708 753

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

Executive Worksurface, Edgeband, 36" D

Model

SEATING

∙∙ Surface has 6" overhang ∙∙ Worksurfaces 72" or above require middle support unless specified with a modesty panel. Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDEFE3060N

177

REFERENCE

SURPASS

SIN 711-2

Straight-Front Corner Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Straight-front corner worksurface

∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDCST2436N

Model

Description

Straight-Front Corner Worksurface, T-Mold, 24" D

Straight-Front Corner Worksurface, T-Mold, 30" D

M-MDCST2436 M-MDCST2442 M-MDCST2448

n

M-MDCST3042 M-MDCST3048

n

n n

n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

36" 42" 48"

42 50 58

3.9 5.2 6.6

679 776 854

30" 30"

42" 48"

55 66

5.2 6.6

868 899

W 36”

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

Notes

W 36”

D 24"

D 24"

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

W 36"

178

W 36"

D 24"

D 24"

Straight-Front Corner Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Straight-front corner worksurface

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDCSE2436N

Description

Straight-Front Corner Worksurface, Edgeband, 24" D

Straight-Front Corner Worksurface, Edgeband, 30" D

Model

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-MDCSE2436 M-MDCSE2442 M-MDCSE2448

n

24"

36"

42

3.9

850

n

24" 24"

42" 48"

50 58

5.2 6.6

875 1147

M-MDCSE3042 M-MDCSE3048

n

30" 30"

42" 48"

55 66

5.4 6.6

1119 1213

n

n

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

Radius-Front Corner Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Radius-front corner worksurface

Notes

Radius-Front Corner Worksurface, T-Mold, 24" D

n

M-MDCCT3042 M-MDCCT3048

n

n n

n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

36" 42" 48"

42 50 58

3.9 5.2 6.6

679 776 854

30" 30"

42" 48"

55 66

5.2 6.6

868 897

W 36”

W 36”

SURPASS

D 24"

D 24" W 36”

W 36”

PREPARE

D 24”

D 24”

STORAGE

Radius-Front Corner Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Radius-front corner worksurface

ACCESSORIES

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDCCE2436N

Radius-Front Corner Worksurface, Edgeband, 24" D

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-MDCCE2436 M-MDCCE2442 M-MDCCE2448

n

24"

36"

42

3.9

850

n

24" 24"

42" 48"

50 58

5.2 6.6

875 1147

M-MDCCE3042 M-MDCCE3048

n

30" 30"

42" 48"

55 66

5.4 6.6

1119 1213

n

n

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

Radius-Front Corner Worksurface, Edgeband, 30" D

Model

SEATING

Description

WORKSURFACES

Radius-Front Corner Worksurface, T-Mold, 30" D

M-MDCCT2436 M-MDCCT2442 M-MDCCT2448

D

PREFIX

Model

Description

EMERGE

∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface Support Kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDCCT2436N

179

REFERENCE

SURPASS

SIN 711-2

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Radius end peninsula worksurface

∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface support kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDPT2460N

Model

Description

M-MDPT2460 M-MDPT2466 M-MDPT2472 M-MDPT3060 M-MDPT3066 M-MDPT3072 M-MDPT3660 M-MDPT3666 M-MDPT3672

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, 24" D

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, 30" D

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, 36" D

n n n n n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24" 30" 30" 30" 36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72" 60" 66" 72" 60" 66" 72"

65 69 73 74 77 80 79 83 86

4.4 5.2 5.2 5.4 6.4 6.4 6.4 7.6 7.6

717 745 824 781 803 891 840 868 962

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

Notes

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

D 30"

W 60”

INDEX

W 60”

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Radius end peninsula worksurface

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface support kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDPE2460N

Description

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, 24" D

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, 30" D

180

D 30"

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, 36" D

Model M-MDPE2460 M-MDPE2466 M-MDPE2472 M-MDPE3060 M-MDPE3066 M-MDPE3072 M-MDPE3660 M-MDPE3666 M-MDPE3672

n n n n n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24" 30" 30" 30" 36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72" 60" 66" 72" 60" 66" 72"

65 69 73 74 77 80 79 83 86

4.4 5.2 5.2 5.4 6.4 6.4 6.4 7.6 7.6

850 875 970 916 943 1045 988 1021 1129

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

Peninsula Return Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Peninsula Return Worksurface

Notes EMERGE

∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface support kits are specified separately.

Peninsula Return Worksurface, T-Mold, 24" D

n n

M-MDPRST2460 M-MDPRST2466 M-MDPRST2472 M-MDPRST3048 M-MDPRST3054 M-MDPRST3060 M-MDPRST3066 M-MDPRST3072

n n n n n n n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24"

48" 54"

57 61

3.7 4.1

670 690

24" 24" 24" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

60" 66" 72" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

65 69 73 68 71 74 77 80

4.4 5.2 5.2 4.6 5.1 5.4 6.4 6.4

717 745 824 736 756 781 803 891

WORKSURFACES

Peninsula Return Worksurface, T-Mold, 30" D

M-MDPRST2448 M-MDPRST2454

D

PREFIX

Model

Description

SURPASS

D 24"

D 24"

PREPARE

W 60”

W 60”

STORAGE

Peninsula Return Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Peninsula Return Worksurface

ACCESSORIES

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface support kits are specified separately.

Peninsula Return Worksurface, Edgeband, 24" D

M-MDPRSE2448

n

M-MDPRSE2454

n

M-MDPRSE2460 M-MDPRSE2466 M-MDPRSE2472 M-MDPRSE3048 M-MDPRSE3054 M-MDPRSE3060 M-MDPRSE3066 M-MDPRSE3072

n n n n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24"

48" 54"

57 61

3.7 4.1

800 825

24" 24" 24" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

60" 66" 72" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

65 69 73 68 71 74 77 80

4.4 5.2 5.2 4.6 5.1 5.4 6.4 6.4

850 875 970 868 894 916 943 1045

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

Peninsula Return Worksurface, Edgeband, 30" D

Model

SEATING

Description

181

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

"b" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ "b"shaped peninsula worksurface

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface support kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDWRT2424N

Model

"b" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, 30" D

STORAGE ACCESSORIES

M-MDPBT3072

D 30"

n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

30"

72"

90

8.6

1050

D 30"

W 72”

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Description

SEATING

SIN 711-2

W 72”

"b" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ "b"shaped peninsula worksurface

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface support kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDWRT2424N

Description

n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

30"

72"

90

8.6

1394

INDEX

"b" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband 30" D

Model M-MDPBE3072

182

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

"d" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface: T-Mold Includes

EMERGE

∙∙ "d"shaped peninsula worksurface

Notes

Model

Description

n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

30"

72"

90

8.6

1050

PREPARE

W 72”

W 72”

STORAGE

"d" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ "d"shaped peninsula worksurface

ACCESSORIES

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface support kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDWRT2424N

"d" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband 30" D

Model M-MDPDE3072

n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

30"

72"

90

8.6

1394

SEATING

Description

SURPASS

D 30"

D 30"

WORKSURFACES

"d" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, 30" D

M-MDPDT3072

PREFIX

∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface support kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDWRT2424N

INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

183

REFERENCE

SURPASS

SIN 711-2

Curved Peninsula Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Curved peninsula worksurface

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface support kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDWRT2424N

Model

Description

Curved Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, Left-Handed

Curved Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, Right-Handed

M-MDGPCT3660L M-MDGPCT3666L M-MDGPCT3672L

n

M-MDGPCT3660R M-MDGPCT3666R M-MDGPCT3672R

n

SURPASS

n

n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

88 92 96

7.4 7.9 8.8

1072 1199 1281

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

88 92 96

7.4 7.9 8.8

1072 1199 1281

right-hand shown

right-hand shown

D 36"

D 36"

PREPARE STORAGE

n

D

W 60”

W 60”

Curved Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband Includes

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

∙∙ Curved peninsula worksurface

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface support kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDWRT2424N

Description

INDEX

Curved Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, Left-Handed

184

Curved Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, Right-Handed

Model M-MDGPCE3660L M-MDGPCE3666L M-MDGPCE3672L

n

M-MDGPCE3660R M-MDGPCE3666R M-MDGPCE3672R

n

n n

n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

88 92 96

7.4 7.9 8.8

1343 1411 1472

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

88 92 96

7.4 7.9 8.8

1343 1411 1472

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

Grand Peninsula Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ Radius end peninsula worksurface

Notes

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, Left-Handed

n

M-MDGPT3660R M-MDGPT3666R M-MDGPT3672R

n

n

n n

Wt.

Cubes

List

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

55 61 68

6.4 7.6 7.6

999 1129 1210

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

55 61 68

6.4 7.6 7.6

999 1129 1210

right-hand shown

D 36"

SURPASS

right-hand shown

n

W

D 36"

PREPARE

W 60”

W 60”

WORKSURFACES

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, T-Mold, Right-Handed

M-MDGPT3660L M-MDGPT3666L M-MDGPT3672L

D

PREFIX

Model

Description

EMERGE

∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface support kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDWRT2424N

STORAGE

Grand Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ Radius end peninsula worksurface

ACCESSORIES

Notes ∙∙ Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). ∙∙ Worksurface support kits are specified separately. ∙∙ Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDWRT2424N

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, Left-Handed

M-MDGPE3660L M-MDGPE3666L M-MDGPE3672L M-MDGPE3660R M-MDGPE3666R M-MDGPE3672R

n n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

55 61 68

6.4 7.6 7.6

1271 1340 1401

36" 36" 36"

60" 66" 72"

55 61 68

6.4 7.6 7.6

1271 1340 1401

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

INDEX

Radius End Peninsula Worksurface, Edgeband, Right-Handed

Model

SEATING

Description

185

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

SIN 711-2

L-Return Radius Front Worksurface: T-Mold Includes ∙∙ L-return radius front worksurface

Notes ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

Worksurfaces 72" or above require middle support unless specified with a modesty panel. Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). Worksurface support kits are specified separately. Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDWRT2424N

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

right-hand shown

D 36"

W 60”

Description

PREPARE

L-Return Radius Front Worksurface, T-Mold, Left-Handed, 36" D L-Return Radius Front Worksurface, T-Mold, Left-Handed, 42" D

L-Return Radius Front Worksurface, T-Mold, Right-Handed, 36" D L-Return Radius Front Worksurface, T-Mold, Right-Handed, 42" D L-Return Radius Front Worksurface, T-Mold, Right-Handed, 48" D

M-MDLRT3660L M-MDLRT3666L M-MDLRT3672L M-MDLRT4260L M-MDLRT4266L M-MDLRT4272L M-MDLRT4860L M-MDLRT4866L M-MDLRT4872L M-MDLRT3660R M-MDLRT3666R M-MDLRT3672R M-MDLRT4260R M-MDLRT4266R M-MDLRT4272R M-MDLRT4860R M-MDLRT4866R M-MDLRT4872R

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

36" 36" 36" 42" 42" 42" 48" 48" 48" 36" 36" 36" 42" 42" 42" 48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72" 60" 66" 72" 60" 66" 72" 60" 66" 72" 60" 66" 72" 60" 66" 72"

59 65 72 67 73 80 75 81 88 59 65 72 67 73 80 75 81 88

6.4 7.6 7.6 7.4 8.7 8.7 8.5 10.1 10.1 6.4 7.6 7.6 7.4 8.7 8.7 8.5 10.1 10.1

914 935 960 937 959 981 960 978 1003 914 935 960 937 959 981 960 978 1003

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

L-Return Radius Front Worksurface, T-Mold, Left-Handed, 48" D

Model

186

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

L-Return Radius Front Worksurface: Edgeband Includes ∙∙ L-return radius front worksurface

EMERGE

Notes Worksurfaces 72" or above require middle support unless specified with a modesty panel. Grain direction runs along width (directional laminates only). Worksurface support kits are specified separately. Add suffix "N" to a model number for no grommets, no upcharge. Example: M-MDWRT2424N

PREFIX

∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙ ∙∙

right-hand shown

WORKSURFACES

D 36"

W 60”

L-Return Radius Front Worksurface, Edgeband, Left-Handed, 36" D

L-Return Radius Front Worksurface, Edgeband, Right-Handed, 36" D

L-Return Radius Front Worksurface, Edgeband, Right-Handed, 48" D

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

Wt.

Cubes

List

36" 36" 36" 42" 42" 42" 48" 48" 48" 36" 36" 36" 42" 42" 42" 48" 48" 48"

60" 66" 72" 60" 66" 72" 60" 66" 72" 60" 66" 72" 60" 66" 72" 60" 66" 72"

59 65 72 67 73 80 75 81 88 59 65 72 67 73 80 75 81 88

6.4 7.6 7.6 7.4 8.7 8.7 8.5 10.1 10.1 6.4 7.6 7.6 7.4 8.7 8.7 8.5 10.1 10.1

996 1018 1045 1021 1043 1070 1045 1068 1089 996 1018 1045 1021 1043 1070 1045 1068 1089

ACCESSORIES

L-Return Radius Front Worksurface, Edgeband, Right-Handed, 42" D

n

W

STORAGE

L-Return Radius Front Worksurface, Edgeband, Left-Handed, 48" D

M-MDLRE3660L M-MDLRE3666L M-MDLRE3672L M-MDLRE4260L M-MDLRE4266L M-MDLRE4272L M-MDLRE4860L M-MDLRE4866L M-MDLRE4872L M-MDLRE3660R M-MDLRE3666R M-MDLRE3672R M-MDLRE4260R M-MDLRE4266R M-MDLRE4272R M-MDLRE4860R M-MDLRE4866R M-MDLRE4872R

D

PREPARE

L-Return Radius Front Worksurface, Edgeband, Left-Handed, 42" D

Model

SURPASS

Description

SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

187

REFERENCE

SURPASS

SIN 711-2

Support Kits: Rectangular & Bowfront Desk Shells - Full Modesty End Panel Legs Includes Notes ∙∙ The support/modesty panel understructure is inset from the worksurface in width and depth.

Description

Model

Desking Rectangular Shell Support Kit, Full Modesty Panels, 24" D

M-MDDS2430FP M-MDDS2436FP M-MDDS2442FP

n

M-MDDS2448FP M-MDDS2454FP M-MDDS2460FP M-MDDS2466FP M-MDDS2472FP

n

M-MDDS3030FP M-MDDS3036FP M-MDDS3042FP M-MDDS3048FP M-MDDS3054FP M-MDDS3060FP M-MDDS3066FP M-MDDS3072FP

n

Desking Rectangular Shell Support Kit, Full Modesty Panels, 30" D

n n

n n n n

n n n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24"

30" 36" 42"

55 57 58

2.7 3.2 3.6

560 575 580

24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

59 60 61 63 65

4.1 4.6 5.1 5.6 6.0

585 595 600 610 620

30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

65 67 68 69 70 71 73 75

2.7 3.2 3.6 4.1 4.6 5.1 5.6 6.0

590 605 610 615 625 630 640 650

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Panel legs, full modesty panel and hardware.

188

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS

Includes ∙∙ Panel legs, half modesty panel and hardware.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ The support/modesty panel understructure is inset from the worksurface in width and depth. ∙∙ Clearance from the bottom of the leveler fully seated to the bottom of the half modesty panel is approximately 14". ∙∙ Height of modesty is 14".

M-MDDS2430HP M-MDDS2436HP M-MDDS2442HP M-MDDS2448HP M-MDDS2454HP M-MDDS2460HP M-MDDS2466HP M-MDDS2472HP M-MDDS3030HP M-MDDS3036HP M-MDDS3042HP M-MDDS3048HP M-MDDS3054HP M-MDDS3060HP M-MDDS3066HP M-MDDS3072HP

Desking Rectangular Shell Support Kit, Half Modesty Panels, 30" D

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

53 55 56 57 58 59 61 64 63 65 66 67 68 69 71 74

2.7 3.2 3.6 4.1 4.6 5.1 5.6 6.0 2.7 3.2 3.6 4.1 4.6 5.1 5.6 6.0

550 565 570 575 585 590 600 610 580 595 600 605 615 620 630 640

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

PREPARE

W

SURPASS

Desking Rectangular Shell Support Kit, Half Modesty Panels, 24" D

D

WORKSURFACES

Model

PREFIX

Description

REFERENCE

Support Kits: Rectangular & Bowfront Desk Shells - Half Modesty End Panel Legs

Rectangular Desk Shells - No Modesty End Panel Legs Kits Includes

STORAGE

∙∙ Panel legs, gussets and hardware.

Notes ∙∙ For use with 36"-60" Wide worksurfaces only.

Desking Rectangular Shell Support Kit, No Modesty Panels, 24" D

Desking Rectangular Shell Support Kit, No Modesty Panels, 30" D

D

M-MDDS24NP

n

24"

62

2.3

520

M-MDDS30NP

n

30"

69

3.3

550

SEATING

Model

ACCESSORIES

Description

INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

189

SIN 711-2

Support Kits: Rectangular and Bowfront Desk Shells - Open Leg End Panel Includes ∙∙ One open leg end panel, one full end panel and full or half modesty panels and hardware.

Notes ∙∙ The support/modesty panel understructure is inset from the worksurface in width and depth ∙∙ Clearance from the bottom of the leveler fully seated to the bottom of the half modesty panel is approximately 14". ∙∙ Height of modesty is 14".

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

Open Leg End Panels, Full Modesty Panels, 24" D

Open Leg End Panels, Full Modesty Panels, 30" D

Open Leg End Panels, Half Modesty Panels, 24" D

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Description

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-MDDS2430FO M-MDDS2436FO M-MDDS2442FO M-MDDS2448FO M-MDDS2454FO M-MDDS2460FO M-MDDS2466FO M-MDDS2472FO

n n n n n n n n

30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

53 55 56 57 58 59 61 64

2.7 3.2 3.6 4.1 4.6 5.1 5.6 6.0

650 665 670 675 685 690 700 710

M-MDDS3030FO M-MDDS3036FO M-MDDS3042FO M-MDDS3048FO M-MDDS3054FO M-MDDS3060FO M-MDDS3066FO M-MDDS3072FO

n n n n n n n n

30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

65 67 68 69 70 71 73 75

2.7 3.2 3.6 4.1 4.6 5.1 5.6 6.0

675 690 695 700 710 715 725 735

M-MDDS2430HO M-MDDS2436HO M-MDDS2442HO

n n n

30" 36" 42"

24" 24" 24"

53 55 56

2.7 3.2 3.6

640 655 660

M-MDDS2448HO M-MDDS2454HO M-MDDS2460HO M-MDDS2466HO M-MDDS2472HO

n n n n n

48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

57 58 59 61 64

4.1 4.6 5.1 5.6 6.0

665 675 680 690 700

M-MDDS3030HO

n

30"

30"

63

2.7

665

M-MDDS3036HO M-MDDS3042HO M-MDDS3048HO M-MDDS3054HO M-MDDS3060HO M-MDDS3066HO M-MDDS3072HO

n n n n n n n

36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

65 66 67 68 69 71 74

3.2 3.6 4.1 4.6 5.1 5.6 6.0

680 685 690 700 705 715 725

INDEX

SEATING

Open Leg End Panels, Half Modesty Panels, 30" D

Model

190

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

Support Kits: Return Shells to Rectangular - Full or Half Modesty Panels Includes ∙∙ Panel leg, attachment bracket, full or half modesty panels and hardware.

M-MDRD2430HP M-MDRD2436HP M-MDRD2442HP M-MDRD2448HP M-MDRD2454HP M-MDRD2460HP

n

M-MDRD3030HP M-MDRD3036HP M-MDRD3042HP M-MDRD3048HP M-MDRD3054HP M-MDRD3060HP

n

Return Shells to Rectangular Support Kit, Half Modesty Panels, 24" D

Return Shells to Rectangular Support Kit, Half Modesty Panels, 30" D

n n n

n n n n n

n n n n n

n n n n n

Wt.

Cubes

List

35 37 38 39 40 41

2.7 3.1 3.5 3.9 4.3 4.7

495 500 505 515 520 530

30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60"

40 42 43 44 45 46

3.3 3.8 4.3 4.8 5.3 5.7

510 515 520 530 535 545

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60"

33 35 36 37 38 39

2.7 3.1 3.5 3.9 4.3 4.7

485 490 495 505 510 520

30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60"

38 40 41 42 43 44

3.3 3.8 4.3 4.8 5.3 5.7

500 505 510 520 525 535

SEATING

n

n

W 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60"

ACCESSORIES

M-MDRD3030FP M-MDRD3036FP M-MDRD3042FP M-MDRD3048FP M-MDRD3054FP M-MDRD3060FP

Return Shells to Rectangular Support Kit, Full Modesty Panels, 30" D

n

D 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

STORAGE

n

PREPARE

M-MDRD2430FP M-MDRD2436FP M-MDRD2442FP M-MDRD2448FP M-MDRD2454FP M-MDRD2460FP

SURPASS

Model

Return Shells to Rectangular Support Kit, Full Modesty Panels, 24" D

WORKSURFACES

Description

PREFIX

∙∙ The support/modesty panel understructure is inset from the worksurface in width and depth. ∙∙ Clearance from the bottom of the leveler fully seated to the bottom of the half modesty panel is approximately 14". ∙∙ Used when connecting return to the front edge of a rectangular desk with a full end panel leg. Cannot connect into open end legs. ∙∙ Height of modesty is 14". ∙∙ Cannot connect into an open end leg.

EMERGE

Notes

INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

191

Includes ∙∙ Panel leg, attachment bracket, full or half modesty panels and hardware.

Notes ∙∙ The support/modesty panel understructure is inset from the worksurface in width and depth. ∙∙ Clearance from the bottom of the leveler fully seated to the bottom of the half modesty panel is approximately 14". ∙∙ Used when connecting return to the front edge of a rectangular desk with a full end panel leg. Cannot connect into open end legs. ∙∙ Height of modesty is 14". ∙∙ Cannot connect into an open end leg.

Description

Model

Return Shells to Rectangular Support Kit, Open Leg End Panel -Full Modesty Panels, 24"D

M-MDRD2430FO M-MDRD2436FO M-MDRD2442FO M-MDRD2448FO M-MDRD2454FO M-MDRD2460FO

n

M-MDRD3030FO M-MDRD3036FO M-MDRD3042FO M-MDRD3048FO M-MDRD3054FO M-MDRD3060FO

n

Return Shells to Rectangular Support Kit, Open Leg End Panel -Full Modesty Panels, 30"D

n n n n

n n n n n

Description

Model

Return Shells to Rectangular Support Kit, Open Leg End Panel -Half Modesty Panels, 24"D

M-MDRD2430HO M-MDRD2436HO

n

M-MDRD2442HO M-MDRD2448HO M-MDRD2454HO M-MDRD2460HO

n

M-MDRD3030HO M-MDRD3036HO M-MDRD3042HO M-MDRD3048HO M-MDRD3054HO M-MDRD3060HO

n

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

n

Return Shells to Rectangular Support Kit, Open Leg End Panel -Half Modesty Panels, 30"D

n

n n n

n n n n n

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"

30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60"

35 37 38 39 40 41

2.7 3.1 3.5 3.9 4.3 4.7

585 590 595 605 610 620

30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60"

40 42 43 44 45 46

3.3 3.8 4.3 4.8 5.3 5.7

595 600 605 615 620 630

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 24"

30" 36"

33 35

2.7 3.1

575 580

24" 24" 24" 24"

42" 48" 54" 60"

36 37 38 39

3.5 3.9 4.3 4.7

585 595 600 610

30" 30" 30" 30" 30" 30"

30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60"

38 40 41 42 43 44

3.3 3.8 4.3 4.8 5.3 5.7

585 590 595 605 610 620

INDEX

SEATING

SIN 711-2

Support Kits: Return Shells to Rectangular - Open Leg End Panel - Full or Half Modesty Panels

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

192

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

End Panel Legs Includes ∙∙ Panel Legs and attachment hardware.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Order Flat brackets and gussets separately.

Description

M-MDOL24 M-MDOL30

n

n n

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

15 25 30

2.3 2.7 3.1

175 210 225

24" 30"

25 27

2.3 2.3

300 310

D

Wt.

Cubes

List

12"

22

2.3

195

SURPASS

W 12" 24" 30"

WORKSURFACES

End Panel - Open Leg - 24", 30"

n

PREFIX

End Panel Leg 12", 24", 30" wide

Model M-MDEP12 M-MDEP24 M-MDEP30

PREPARE

Support Leg Includes

STORAGE

∙∙ 1 Support Leg, support bracket and hardware.

Notes ∙∙ Modesties and gussets can attach into either side of the leg. (sold separately)

Support Leg

Model M-MDSL

n

ACCESSORIES

Description

SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

193

REFERENCE

SURPASS

SIN 711-2

Peninsula Modesty Panels Includes W

Notes ∙∙ Can be used on any shape peninsula ∙∙ Can be mounted in multiple locations to allow for keyboard tray or pencil drawer. ∙∙ 14" high.

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Modesty panel and mounting hardware.

Description

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

9.2 10.8 12.4 13.2 14.8 16.4

1.6 1.9 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.1

369 391 410 433 449 471

Model

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

12"

28

1.0

130

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

Peninsula Modesty Panel

Model M-MDPM42 M-MDPM48 M-MDPM54 M-MDPM60 M-MDPM66 M-MDPM72

Peninsula Column Leg ∙∙ 1 Peninsula Column Leg

Notes

Description Peninsula Column Leg

M-MDPC29

n

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

Includes

194

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

Return Bracket Includes ∙∙ Flat Bracket, modesty panel-to-end-panel bracket.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Connects return worksurface and modesty panel to end panels and perpendicular worksurface (nonhanded).

Model

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

Maxon Desking Return Kit Support

M-MDCRK29

n

6

.4

110

PREFIX

SURPASS Return Kit

Description

WORKSURFACES

Bridge Bracket Includes ∙∙ 2 flat brackets, 2 modesty panel-to-end-panel brackets.

SURPASS

Notes ∙∙ Connects bridge worksurfaces and modesty panel to end panels and worksurfaces that are perpendicular to the bridge worksurface.

Model

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

Maxon Desking Bridge Kit Support

M-MDCBK29

n

10

.4

175

PREPARE

SURPASS Bridge Kit

Description

STORAGE

Corner Leg

ACCESSORIES

Includes ∙∙ Corner Leg

Notes ∙∙ Attaches two modesty panels at rear of corner desk.

Model

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

Maxon Desking Corner Leg Support

M-MDCDL29

n

7

.4

110

SEATING

SURPASS Corner Leg

Description

INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

195

REFERENCE

SURPASS

SIN 711-2

Flat Brackets Includes ∙∙ 1 Flat Bracket

∙∙ Grey finish only.

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

Notes

Description

Model

24" Flat Bracket 30" Flat Bracket

M-FB24 M-FB30

n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 30"

3 5

0.3 0.8

55 77

Wt.

Cubes

List

5

0.6

100

Gusset Bracket Includes ∙∙ 1 Gussett Bracket Set (2 brackets, 1 right-handed and 1 left-handed)

SURPASS

Notes

Description

STORAGE

PREPARE

Gussett Bracket

Model M-MDPG

n

Panel Mount Bracket ∙∙ 1 Panel Mount Bracket, Right or Left Hand. Additional Corner Worksurface Bracket included.

Notes ∙∙ Connects a modesty panel to a systems panel. ∙∙ Choose right or left-handed; hand of bracket is the hand of the surface you're attaching to, when facing the surface. ∙∙ Additional bracket is sold with kit to secure the front edge of the surface to the panel.

Description

Model

Panel Mount Bracket

M-MDPMBLH M-MDPMBRH

n n

Wt.

Cubes

List

3 3

0.2 0.2

118 118

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

Includes

196

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

Full Modesty Panel - Standard Includes ∙∙ Full modesty panel and hardware

EMERGE

Notes

Description

M-MDMP42FP M-MDMP48FP M-MDMP54FP M-MDMP60FP M-MDMP66FP M-MDMP72FP

n

n n

n n n n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 30" 36"

8 10 12

2.1 2.6 3.1

130 140 155

42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

13 14 16 17 19 20

3.6 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 7.4

160 165 175 180 190 200

WORKSURFACES

n

PREFIX

Full Modesty Panel

Model M-MDMP24FP M-MDMP30FP M-MDMP36FP

SURPASS

Half Modesty Panel - Standard Includes ∙∙ Half modesty panel and hardware

PREPARE

Notes ∙∙ Height of modesty is 14".

Half Modesty Panel

Model

M-MDMP42HP M-MDMP48HP M-MDMP54HP M-MDMP60HP M-MDMP66HP M-MDMP72HP

n

n n

n n n n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 30" 36"

6 8 10

2.1 2.6 3.1

120 130 145

42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

11 12 14 15 17 18

3.6 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 7.4

150 155 165 170 180 190

SEATING

n

ACCESSORIES

M-MDMP24HP M-MDMP30HP M-MDMP36HP

STORAGE

Description

INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

197

Includes ∙∙ Full modesty stand-alone corner support and hardware

Notes

Description Full Modesty Stand Alone Corner

WORKSURFACES SURPASS

SIN 711-2

Full Modesty Stand-Alone Corner

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

Model M-MDMPC36F M-MDMPC42F M-MDMPC48F

n

M-MDMPC60F M-MDMPC66F M-MDMPC72F

n

n n

n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

36" 42" 48"

12 13 14

3.1 3.6 4.0

170 180 190

60" 66" 72"

17 19 20

5.0 5.5 7.4

200 210 220

Half Modesty Stand-Alone Corner Includes Notes ∙∙ Height of modesty is 14".

Description Half Modesty Stand Alone Corner

Model M-MDMPC36H M-MDMPC42H M-MDMPC48H

n

M-MDMPC60H M-MDMPC66H M-MDMPC72H

n

n n

n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

36" 42" 48"

62 63 65

3.1 3.6 4.0

160 170 180

60" 66" 72"

15 17 18

5.0 5.5 7.4

190 200 210

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

∙∙ Half modesty stand-alone corner support and hardware

198

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

Full Modesty End of Bench Includes ∙∙ Full modesty support and hardware

EMERGE

Notes

Full Modesty End of Bench

Model

M-MDMPEB48FP M-MDMPEB54FP M-MDMPEB60FP

n

n n

n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

30" 36" 42"

10 12 13

2.6 3.1 3.6

170 180 190

48" 54" 60"

14 16 17

4.0 4.5 5.0

200 210 220

WORKSURFACES

M-MDMPEB30FP M-MDMPEB36FP M-MDMPEB42FP

n

PREFIX

Description

SURPASS

Half Modesty End of Bench Includes ∙∙ Half modesty support and hardware

PREPARE

Notes ∙∙ Height of modesty is 14".

Half Modesty End of Bench

Model n

M-MDMPEB48HP M-MDMPEB54HP M-MDMPEB60HP

n

n n

n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

30" 36" 42"

8 10 11

2.6 3.1 3.6

160 170 180

48" 54" 60"

12 14 15

4.0 4.5 5.0

190 200 210

ACCESSORIES

M-MDMPEB30HP M-MDMPEB36HP M-MDMPEB42HP

STORAGE

Description

SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

199

SIN 711-2

Sound Deadening Modesty Panel Inserts Includes ∙∙ Full or Half Modesty Panel sound deadening foam core insert

Notes ∙∙ Helps deaden sound ∙∙ Can use same size as support kit or smaller. ∙∙ Sound deadening modesty panel inserts will block modesty panel knockouts. Consider a smaller size if you need to utilize the knockouts in the support kit.

Description

Model

Sound Deadening Modesty Panel Insert - Full Modesty Panel

M-MDSDM24FP M-MDSDM30FP M-MDSDM36FP M-MDSDM42FP M-MDSDM48FP M-MDSDM54FP M-MDSDM60FP M-MDSDM66FP M-MDSDM72FP

n

M-MDSDM24HP M-MDSDM30HP M-MDSDM36HP M-MDSDM42HP M-MDSDM48HP M-MDSDM54HP M-MDSDM60HP M-MDSDM66HP M-MDSDM72HP

n

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

n n n n n n n

n n n n n n n n

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

9 9 10 11 12 14 16 18 19

2.6 2.6 3.1 3.6 4.0 4.7 5.0 5.5 6.0

431 449 466 485 502 520 538 556 573

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

9 9 9 10 11 12 13 15 17

2.6 2.6 3.1 3.6 4.0 4.7 5.0 5.5 6.0

413 431 449 466 485 502 520 538 556

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

Sound Deadening Modesty Panel Insert - Half Modesty Panel

n

W

200

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE EMERGE PREFIX WORKSURFACES SURPASS PREPARE STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

201

REFERENCE

SURPASS

SIN 711-2

Hutch with Open Lower Back Includes Notes ∙∙ Hutches come with brackets that wrap around the edge of the work surface. The width of the hutch and surface must match. ∙∙ Overall hutch height is 345/8

PREFIX

EMERGE

∙∙ Hutch with open lower back and hardware

Description

WORKSURFACES

Hutch with standard flat front painted steel doors

Model M-MDHO1536E M-MDHO1542E M-MDHO1548E

n n n n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

36" 42" 48"

59 63 67

3.1 3.1 3.9

1072 1139 1195

60" 66" 72"

76 81 87

4.7 5.1 5.1

1535 1586 1645

PREPARE

SURPASS

M-MDHO1560E M-MDHO1566E M-MDHO1572E

n

Open Shelf Hutch with Open Lower Back

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

Includes ∙∙ Open shelf hutch with open lower back and hardware.

Notes ∙∙ Hutches come with brackets that wrap around the edge of the work surface. The width of the hutch and surface must match. ∙∙ Overall hutch height is 361/8

Description

n

M-MDSO60E M-MDSO66E M-MDSO72E

n

n n

n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

36" 42" 48"

34 35 37

5.1 5.8 6.6

725 763 796

60" 66" 72"

41 44 46

8.1 8.9 9.7

868 904 941

INDEX

SEATING

Open shelf hutch with open back

Model M-MDSO36E M-MDSO42E M-MDSO48E

202

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

Hutch Lock Includes ∙∙ Each M-LC1 kit includes one core and core removal tool, two keys and instructions.

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Order required quantity of M-LC1 Kits and specify key number between 101 and 225 for each keyed-alike group.

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-LC

n

Lock Core Kit

0.1

0.1

33

Master Key (1)

M-MK

n

0.1

0.1

20

Example

WORKSURFACES

Model

PREFIX

Description

Hutch Lock shown in application.

SURPASS

Lock is underneath door.

PREPARE STORAGE

Hutch Tackboard Includes ∙∙ Tackboard for Hutch

∙∙ Must be used with a Hutch

Model

Tackboard for Hutch

M-MDHT1536 M-MDHT1542 M-MDHT1548 M-MDHT1554 M-MDHT1560 M-MDHT1566 M-MDHT1572

n n n n n n n

W

Wt.

Cubes

Grade A List

Grade B Upcharge

36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0

1.7 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.1 1.7

337 357 368 381 396 418 428

16 16 16 16 18 19 19

SEATING

Description

ACCESSORIES

Notes

INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

203

SIN 711-2

Desk Mounted Fabric Screen Includes ∙∙ Fabric screen and hardware

Notes ∙∙ Screens are fastened to the top of the worksurface. Screen can be the same size or smaller that the worksurface it is being attached to. Grade A Grade B List Upcharge

Description

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

Desk Mounted Fabric Screen, 13" H

M-MDDS1324F M-MDDS1330F M-MDDS1336F M-MDDS1342F M-MDDS1348F

13" 13" 13" 13" 13"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48"

4.5 5.0 5.5 7.0 8.0

1.0 2.2 2.5 3.1 3.4

676 693 763 783 799

16 16 16 16 16

M-MDDS1354F

13"

54"

9.0

4.4

817

16

M-MDDS1360F

13"

60"

9.0

2.2

835

16

Description

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

Desk Mounted Fabric Screen, 20" H

M-MDDS2024F M-MDDS2030F M-MDDS2036F M-MDDS2042F M-MDDS2048F

20" 20" 20" 20" 20"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48"

4.5 5.0 5.5 7.0 8.0

1.9 2.2 2.5 3.1 3.4

702 720 791 809 825

16 16 16 16 16

M-MDDS2054F

20"

54"

9.0

4.4

844

16

M-MDDS2060F

20"

60"

9.0

2.2

861

16

Grade A Grade B List Upcharge

Desk Mounted Return Fabric Screen Includes ∙∙ Fabric screen and hardware

Notes ∙∙ Return screens are used perpendicular to standard desk screens. ∙∙ Return screens are 2" short of nominal so as not to interfere with the primary desk screen. Grade A Grade B List Upcharge

Description

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

Desk Mounted Return Fabric Screen

M-MDRS1324F M-MDRS1330F

13" 13"

22" 28"

4.5 5.0

1.0 2.2

676 693

16 16

M-MDRS2024F M-MDRS2030F

20" 20"

22" 28"

4.5 5.0

1.9 2.2

702 720

16 16

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

204

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

Desk Mounted Glass Screen Includes ∙∙ Glass screen and hardware

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Screens are screwed to the top of the worksurface. Screen can be the same size or smaller that the worksurface it is being attached to.

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

Clear List

Frosted List

Desk Mounted Glass Screen, 13" H

M-MDDS1324G M-MDDS1330G M-MDDS1336G M-MDDS1342G M-MDDS1348G

13" 13" 13" 13" 13"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48"

4.5 5.0 5.5 7.0 8.0

1.9 2.2 2.5 3.1 3.4

729 763 799 835 869

777 811 847 883 917

M-MDDS1354G

13"

54"

9.0

4.4

905

953

M-MDDS1360G

13"

60"

9.0

2.2

940

988

WORKSURFACES

Model

PREFIX

Description

SURPASS PREPARE

Desk Mounted Return Glass Screen Includes ∙∙ Glass screen and hardware

Notes STORAGE

∙∙ Return screens are used perpendicular to standard desk screen. ∙∙ Return screens are 2" short of nominal so as not to interfere with the primary desk screen.

Model

H

W

Wt.

Cubes

Clear List

Frosted List

Desk Mounted Return Glass Screen

M-MDRS1324G M-MDRS1330G

13" 13"

22" 28"

4.5 5.0

1.9 2.2

729 763

777 811

ACCESSORIES

Description

SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

205

SIN 711-2

Accessories Notes ∙∙ The Hutch Accessory Rail is 5" high and provides a continuous full-width slot for mounting personal accessory components. ∙∙ Fabric Screen Accessory Rails cannot be used back to back on the same screen. ∙∙ Diagonal trays are non-handed. ∙∙ Accessories will fit on either the Hutch or Fabric Screen accessory rail.

Model M-MDPAR36 M-MDPAR42 M-MDPAR48 M-MDPAR54 M-MDPAR60 M-MDPAR66 M-MDPAR72

n

M-MDAR24 M-MDAR30 M-MDAR36 M-MDAR42 M-MDAR48

n

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72"

7.0 7.5 8.0 9.0 9.0 9.5 10.0

1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6

208 216 233 249 261 270 287

n

13" 13" 13" 13" 13"

24" 30" 36" 42" 48"

5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0

0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4

281 305 323 344 371

Personal Shelf

M-PS21

n

1.7"

21.6"

3

0.5

135

Letter Tray

M-LT

n

1.7"

13"

2

0.5

132

Binder Bin

M-SB

n

8.5"

5.2"

3

0.8

132

Diagonal Tray - (Non-handed) (3)

M-DT

n

8.5

4.5

2

0.3

182

WORKSURFACES

H 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5"

PREPARE

Description Hutch Accessory Rail

STORAGE

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

n n n n n

n n n

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

SURPASS

Fabric Screen Accessory Rail

n

206

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

Accessories Continued... List

n

8.9"

12"

2

0.3

135

M-CLIP2

n

1.9"

5"

1

0.2

135

Small Paper Clip Tray

M-SMTRAY

n

1.8"

6.8"

1

0.1

94

Tool Box

M-TB

n

5.25

5"

1

0.2

105

File Pocket

M-FP

Paper Clip

SURPASS

Cubes

WORKSURFACES

Wt.

PREFIX

W

Model

EMERGE

H

Description

PREPARE STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

207

SIN 711-2

Wire Management Trays Includes ∙∙ Tray and mounting hardware

Notes ∙∙ Wire management trays are screwed to the underside of the worksurface. ∙∙ Used to manage computer cords, phone cords, etc.

Description

Model

Wire Management Tray

M-MDWMT24 M-MDWMT36

n n

W

H

D

Wt.

Cubes

List

24" 36"

4" 4"

4" 4"

2 3

0.4 0.5

117 134

L

Wt.

Cubes

List

6" 12" 18"

2.5 3.0 3.5

0.2 0.2 0.2

91 104 123

4.0 4.5 4.8 5.0 5.3 5.5 5.0 5.25

0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.0 0.6 0.6 0.7

135 153 167 180 197 211 228 241

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

Electrical Jumper

PREPARE

Includes ∙∙ Electrical Jumper ∙∙ 4 wires, 2 circuits, each circuit is rated at 20 Amps each

Notes

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

∙∙ Connects one receptacle block to another ∙∙ Each jumper is rated at 15 amps

208

Description

Model

Electrical Jumper

M-MDEJ6 M-MDEJ12 M-MDEJ18

n

M-MDEJ24 M-MDEJ30 M-MDEJ36 M-MDEJ42 M-MDEJ48 M-MDEJ54 M-MDEJ60 M-MDEJ66

n

n

24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66"

M-MDEJ72

n

72"

5.5

0.7

259

M-MDEJ78

n

78"

5.8

0.8

272

M-MDEJ84

n

84"

6.0

0.8

286

M-MDEJ90

n

90"

6.3

0.8

303

n n

n n n n n n

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

Electrical Power Feeds Includes ∙∙ Electrical power feed ∙∙ 4 wires, 2 circuits, 20 Amps each

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ Feeds power to receptacle blocks Model M-MDEPF36 M-MDEPF48 M-MDEPF60

n

M-MDEPF72 M-MDEPF96 M-MDEPF144

n

n n

n n

L

Wt.

Cubes

List

36" 48" 60"

4.5 5.3 5.0

0.4 0.5 0.6

160 179 197

72" 96" 144"

5.5 6.3 9.8

0.7 0.7 0.7

211 236 308

PREFIX

Description Electrical Feed

WORKSURFACES

Electrical Power Connectors Includes ∙∙ Electrical power connector - 4 way "H" ∙∙ 4 wires, 2 circuits, 20 Amps each

Model

Power Connector

M-MDEC4

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

0.5

0.1

40

SURPASS

Description

PREPARE STORAGE ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

209

SIN 711-2

Electrical Power Receptacle and Clip Includes ∙∙ Electrical power receptacle or clip ∙∙ A clip is requred for each receptacle ∙∙ 4 wires, 2 circuits, 20 Amps each Description

Model

Power Receptacle Circuit 1

M-MDER1

Description

Model

Power Receptacle Circuit 2

M-MDER2

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

1

0.1

101

Wt.

Cubes

List

1

0.1

101

Wt.

Cubes

List

Description

Model

Power Receptacle Clip

M-MDEC

n

n

0.3

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

EXCLUDE11D 0.1

Electrical Management Power Pole ∙∙ 2" x 2" pole (two pieces), bottom trim, connecting pins, top ceiling trim and hardware.

Notes ∙∙ The Power Pole routes cables from floor to ceiling (123" high) ∙∙ Power Poles can hold up to 24 Cat 5E or Cat 6 cables (up to 18 if power and data in the same pole). ∙∙ A separate (empty) Power Pole for data cables is recommended.

Description

Model

Power Pole

M-MDPP

n

Wt.

Cubes

List

12.7

0.9

528

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

Includes

210

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-2

SURPASS REFERENCE

Electrical Management J-Hook Includes ∙∙ M-MDJC - 1 J-Hook, 2 mounting screws ∙∙ M-MDJC12 - 12 pack J-Hooks, 2 mounting screws per hook

EMERGE

Notes ∙∙ J-Hooks are black

Model

J-Hook

M-MDJC M-MDJC12

n n

Wt.

Cubes

List

0.1 0.12

0.3 0.3

33 124

PREFIX

Description

WORKSURFACES SURPASS

Desk Height Power/Data Notes

Description

Model

Pull-Up Receptacle (fits inside grommet)

Desk height Power/Data Receptacle (fits inside grommet)

PREPARE

∙∙ For use in grommets. Remove grommet cap and replace with power/data receptacle. ∙∙ Available in black finish only. ∙∙ Allows convenience of worksurface height electrical outlet.

D

W

Wt.

Cubes

List

M-EDPU

8.625"

2

2

1

0.2

300

M-GDOME

n

2.75"

2.25"

7.625"

1

0.1

349

STORAGE

H n

ACCESSORIES SEATING INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

211

SIN 711-2

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

SURPASS

212

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

SIN 711-11

PREPARE REFERENCE EMERGE PREFIX

List prices include core paint and laminate options, offered with edgeband edge only.

Table Tops

ACCESSORIES SEATING

Seating Capacity Table Tops Seating Capacity Rectangle Round 24" x 36" Rectangle.................................................... 1 30" Round................................................................... 2 24" x 48" Rectangle.................................................... 2 36" Round................................................................... 4 24" x 60" Rectangle.................................................... 2 42" Round .................................................................. 4 24" x 72" Rectangle.................................................... 3 48" Round................................................................... 5 30" x 48" Rectangle.................................................... 4 30" x 60" Rectangle..................................................... 4 Square 30" Square.................................................................. 2 30" x 72" Rectangle.................................................... 6 36" Square.................................................................. 4 36" x 48" Rectangle.................................................... 4 42" Square.................................................................. 4 36" x 60" Rectangle.................................................... 4 48" Square.................................................................. 4 36" x 72" Rectangle.................................................... 6 36" x 84" Rectangle.................................................... 6 36" x 96" Rectangle.................................................... 8 48" x 60" Rectangle.................................................... 6 48" x 72" Rectangle.................................................... 6 48" x 84" Rectangle.................................................... 8 48" x 96" Rectangle.................................................... 8

STORAGE

Table Capabilities

PREPARE

All PREPARE tables offer: • High pressure laminate (HPL) surfaces. Durability providing for extended performance and usage. • Steel leg construction.

SURPASS

Maxon introduces PREPARE, our line of teaming and tasking tables. PREPARE means: • Height adjustable tops and bases. A variety of rectangular worksurface sizes work with select base styles. • Versatility. Use PREPARE as a single unit or specify tables together for conferencing needs. For conference tables, choose "X" or "T" style base. Teaming tables feature legs with castors, allowing them to move with the changes in your environment. • Variety. Choose from a number of shapes and sizes to expand your worksurface areas. • Harmony. PREPARE works well with Maxon systems; PREFIX, EMERGE and SURPASS.

WORKSURFACES

PREPARE™

INDEX

Prices effective January 4, 2016. Information in this pricebook is accurate as of January 4, 2016. The pricebook is updated monthly. Go to www. MaxonEdge.com to find the most current pricing information in the electronic pricebook. Information is updated monthly in CAD and GIZA. Maxon recommends updating 20-20 Technologies software every month. *Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

213

INDEX

SEATING

ACCESSORIES

STORAGE

PREPARE

SURPASS

WORKSURFACES

PREFIX

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREPARE

214

SIN 711-11

Clearance Dimensions “X” Disc “T” Table Base Table Base Table Base Post Legs E1 W E2 E2 E2 E1 W E2 D Edge of Between Edge of Edge of Between Edge of Between table to Legs table to table to Legs table to Legs Approximate dimensions outside outside outside outside shown in inches of leg of leg of leg of leg 30" Round — — — 133⁄4" 133⁄4" — — — — 36" Round — — — 163⁄4" 163⁄4" — — — — 42" Round — — — 193⁄4" 193⁄4" 1" 23" 1" 23" 48" Round — — — 223⁄4" 223⁄4" 1" 271⁄2" 1" 271⁄2" 30" Square — — — 133⁄4" 133⁄4" — — — — 36" Square — — — 163⁄4" 163⁄4" 11⁄2" 27" 11⁄2" 27" 42" Square — — — 193⁄4" — 11⁄2" 33" 11⁄2" 33" 48" Square — — — 223⁄4" — 11⁄2" 39" 11⁄2" 39" 24" x 36" Rectangle 24" x 48" Rectangle 24" x 60" Rectangle 24" x 72" Rectangle 30" x 48" Rectangle 30" x 60" Rectangle 30" x 72" Rectangle 36" x 48" Rectangle 36" x 60" Rectangle 36" x 72" Rectangle 36" x 84" Rectangle 36" x 96" Rectangle 48" x 60" Rectangle 48" x 72" Rectangle 48" x 84" Rectangle 48" x 96" Rectangle

1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 9" 9" 17" 17" 9" 9" 15" 17"

Base Style: Dimension Location:

31" 105⁄8" — 43" 105⁄8" — 55" 105⁄8" — 67" 105⁄8" — 43" 135⁄8" — 55" 135⁄8" — 67" 135⁄8" — 42" 165⁄8" — 38" 165⁄8" — 50" 165⁄8" — 46" 165⁄8" — 58" 165⁄8" — 38" 225⁄8" — 50" 225⁄8" — 50" 225⁄8" — 58" 225⁄8" —

— 11⁄2" — 11⁄2" — 11⁄2" — 11⁄2" — 11⁄2" — 11⁄2" — 11⁄2" — 11⁄2" — 11⁄2" — 11⁄2" — 11⁄2" — 11⁄2" — 11⁄2" — 11⁄2" — 11⁄2" — 11⁄2"

27" 11⁄2" 15" 39" 11⁄2" 15" 51" 11⁄2" 15" 63" 11⁄2" 15" 39" 11⁄2" 21" 51" 11⁄2" 21" 63" 11⁄2" 21" 39" 11⁄2" 27" 51" 11⁄2" 27" 63" 11⁄2" 27" 75" 11⁄2" 27" 87" 11⁄2" 27" 39" 11⁄2" 39" 63" 11⁄2" 39" 75" 11⁄2" 39" 87" 11⁄2" 39"

2-Stage C-Leg Base E1

W1

W2

E2

PREPARE Top: (Surface dimensions are nominal. Actual widths are reduced by 2")

Edge of table to outside of leg

Between legs

Between legs

Edge of table to the outside of leg

24" x 48" Rectangle

23⁄8"

371⁄4"

—

127⁄8"

24" x 54" Rectangle

3

2 ⁄8"

1

43 ⁄4"

—

127⁄8"

24" x 60" Rectangle

23⁄8"

491⁄4"

—

127⁄8"

24" x 66" Rectangle

3

2 ⁄8"

1

55 ⁄4"

—

127⁄8"

24" x 72" Rectangle

3

2 ⁄8"

1

61 ⁄4"

—

127⁄8"

30" x 48" Rectangle

23⁄8"

371⁄4"

—

177⁄8"

30" x 54" Rectangle

3

2 ⁄8"

1

43 ⁄4"

—

177⁄8"

30" x 60" Rectangle

23⁄8"

491⁄4"

—

177⁄8"

30" x 66" Rectangle

23⁄8"

551⁄4"

—

177⁄8"

30" x 72" Rectangle

3

2 ⁄8"

1

61 ⁄4"

—

177⁄8"

60" x 36" L-Return

73⁄8"

425⁄8"

263⁄8"

—

60" x 48" L-Return

3

7 ⁄8"

5

42 ⁄8"

3

37 ⁄8"

—

72" x 36" L-Return

73⁄8"

545⁄8"

263⁄8"

—

72" x 48" L-Return

73⁄8"

545⁄8"

373⁄8"

—

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

PREPARE

SIN 711-11

REFERENCE

Height-Adjustable Tops and Bases PREPARE™ adjustable-height bases are available in two styles:

EMERGE PREFIX

2-Stage Electric C-Leg Base with Corner Cove Worksurface

2-Stage Electric C-Leg Base with Rectangular Worksurface

Bottom Views

WORKSURFACES

2-Stage with C-Legs

SURPASS PREPARE

Clearance Dimensions Rectangle

Corner

STORAGE

W

E2

Post Legs

Post Legs

E1

E2 W

D

SEATING

E1

“T” Base, “X” Base, or Disc Base

ACCESSORIES

“T” Base

INDEX

*Fabrics, Laminates, Paints and upcharges associated with each are now outlined in the front of the pricebook. A guide on "How to Specify" product has also been added to the beginning.

215

EMERGE

REFERENCE

PREPARE

SIN 711-11

Height-Adjustable Specification Information Height-Adjustable Worksurfaces • • • •

Height-adjustable worksurfaces are available in laminate with edgeband. Worksurface dimensions are nominal. Actual widths are reduced by 2" (1" each side). Corner cove depth is nominal, actual is 1" less. PREPARE worksurfaces are pre-drilled with mounting location for bases. Any open span 60" and greater requires an external support channel. PREPARE corner cove and 66"-72"W rectangular worksurfaces include an external support channel. • Rectangular worksurface grommet location is limited to center location due to mounting of worksurface supports at each end of the worksurface. • Load capacity is 300 pounds for 2-leg models and 450 pounds for 3-leg model, including weight of worksurface.

• • • • • • • •

Electric height-adjustable base units are available in 2 styles: 2-Stage with C-Legs or 2-Stage C-Legs with 3 legs. 2-Stage models travel at 1.5" per second. Motor devices have a continuous cycle time of 2 minutes with an 18 minute rest period before it can be cycled again. Control box is powered by 110-120V/60Hz/4A. Standby power is